Instruction manual HRVS-Dn - Esco Drives & Automation

Instruction manual HRVS-Dn - Esco Drives & Automation Instruction manual HRVS-Dn - Esco Drives & Automation

01.11.2014 Views

HRVS-DN Medium Voltage Digital Soft Starter 60-1,200A, 2,300-15,000V Instruction and Commissioning Manual Ver.07/01/2009

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

Medium Voltage Digital Soft Starter<br />

60-1,200A, 2,300-15,000V<br />

<strong>Instruction</strong> and Commissioning Manual<br />

Ver.07/01/2009


3 • Table of Contents<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN <strong>Instruction</strong> and Commissioning Manual<br />

Table of Contents<br />

1. List of Figures...........................................................................................................................6<br />

2. Safety & Warnings....................................................................................................................8<br />

2.1 Safety..........................................................................................................................................8<br />

2.2 Attention......................................................................................................................................8<br />

2.3 Warnings.....................................................................................................................................8<br />

3. Introduction...............................................................................................................................9<br />

3.1 Why Solcon? Why Soft Starters?................................................................................................9<br />

3.2 How Soft Starters Work? ..........................................................................................................10<br />

Main Features, Options and Advantages ........................................................................................11<br />

4. Technical Data ........................................................................................................................13<br />

4.1 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit).................................................................................................13<br />

4.2 Typical Connection of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit) .......................................................14<br />

4.3 Typical Connection of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN in a Cabinet....................................................................15<br />

4.3.1 Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV ...............................................................15<br />

4.3.2 Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up. ....................................................16<br />

4.4 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Selection..................................................................................................................17<br />

4.4.1 Motor Current and Starting Conditions..........................................................................17<br />

4.4.2 PIV (Peak Inverse Voltage)...........................................................................................17<br />

4.4.3 Rated Currents Frame Sizes.........................................................................................18<br />

4.5 Ordering Information.................................................................................................................19<br />

4.5.1 Ordering IP00 Unit (OEM kit) ........................................................................................19<br />

4.5.2 Ordering a Cabinet Installed Soft Starter ......................................................................21<br />

4.6 Power Connections Description................................................................................................23<br />

4.7 Control Connections Description ..............................................................................................24<br />

4.7.1 Input Terminal 7 - Test/Reset/MULTI SOFT STOP.......................................................30<br />

4.7.2 Input Terminal 8 - Dual Adjust/Reset ............................................................................30<br />

4.7.3 Output Terminals 10, 11 & 12 – Immediate/# Strts PreAlarm .......................................30<br />

5. Recommended Wiring Diagrams ..........................................................................................31<br />

5.1 Control Supply and Control Inputs From a Single Source ........................................................31<br />

5.2 Separate Sources for Control Supply and Control Inputs .........................................................31<br />

5.3 Three Separate Sources for Control Supply and Control Inputs...............................................32<br />

5.4 Soft Start and Immediate Stop (No Soft Stop)..........................................................................32<br />

5.5 Soft Start and Soft Stop wiring..................................................................................................33<br />

5.6 Soft Start, Soft Stop and Immediate Stop Wiring......................................................................33<br />

5.7 Soft Start, Soft Stop and Stop...................................................................................................34<br />

5.8 External Fault............................................................................................................................34<br />

5.9 Dual Adjustment (Control Input #8)...........................................................................................34<br />

5.10 Bypass Contactor......................................................................................................................35<br />

5.11 Operating via Communication Links .........................................................................................36<br />

5.12 Control Input #7 ........................................................................................................................37<br />

5.13 Control Input #8 ........................................................................................................................37<br />

6. Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet ...........................................................................38<br />

6.1 Mounting ...................................................................................................................................38<br />

6.1.1 Low Voltage Section......................................................................................................39<br />

6.2 Temperature Range & Heat Dissipation ...................................................................................39<br />

6.3 Control Module Main PCB and Optional PCBs.........................................................................40<br />

6.4 Dip Switch Settings on the Main PCB.......................................................................................40<br />

6.4.1 Switch # 1 – Display Modes ..........................................................................................40<br />

______________________________________________________________________________________


4 • Table of Contents<br />

6.4.2 Switch # 2 – Tacho Feedback (0-10VDC).....................................................................41<br />

6.4.3 Switches # 5, 6 – Language Selection ..........................................................................41<br />

6.4.4 Switch # 7 – Extended Settings.....................................................................................42<br />

6.4.5 Switch # 8 – Software Lock...........................................................................................42<br />

6.5 Analog I/O (Option 5) (Terminals Gnd, Out (-), Out (+)) ..........................................................43<br />

6.6 Insulation test (Option 4) (Terminals 25, 26, 27 and Leak).....................................................44<br />

6.7 Remote Key-Pad Installation ....................................................................................................45<br />

7. Control Keypad .......................................................................................................................47<br />

7.1 LCD Arrangement.....................................................................................................................47<br />

7.2 Push-Buttons ............................................................................................................................47<br />

7.3 Status LEDs..............................................................................................................................48<br />

7.4 Reviewing and Modifying Parameters ......................................................................................48<br />

7.5 Upon first Control Voltage Connection......................................................................................48<br />

7.6 Special Actions Performed in TEST/MAINTENANCE Mode ....................................................48<br />

7.6.1 Run Self Test.................................................................................................................48<br />

7.6.2 View Software Version ..................................................................................................49<br />

7.6.3 Obtain Default Parameters............................................................................................49<br />

7.6.4 Reset Statistical Data....................................................................................................49<br />

7.6.5 Calibrate Voltage and Current (Factory Use Only!).......................................................50<br />

7.6.6 Setting Time and Date...................................................................................................50<br />

7.7 Mode Pages..............................................................................................................................51<br />

7.8 Overview of All Mode Pages and Factory Defaults...................................................................52<br />

7.8.1 Display Mode – Page 0 .................................................................................................54<br />

7.8.2 Main & Protect. – Page 1 ..............................................................................................55<br />

7.8.2.1 Tripping Curves of the Integrated Overload Protection ..........................................58<br />

7.8.3 Start Parameters – Page 2............................................................................................60<br />

7.8.3.1 Soft Start Parameters.............................................................................................64<br />

7.8.3.2 Special Control for Synchronous Motors Excitation ...............................................65<br />

7.8.4 Stop Parameters – Page 3............................................................................................66<br />

7.8.4.1 Soft Stop Parameters .............................................................................................67<br />

7.8.5 Dual Adjustment Parameters – Page 4 .........................................................................68<br />

7.8.6 Fault Parameters – Page 6 ...........................................................................................69<br />

7.8.7 I/O Programming Parameters – Page 7 ........................................................................71<br />

7.8.7.1 Terminal 7 and 8 Programming..............................................................................72<br />

7.8.8 Comm. Parameters – Page 8 – With the Modbus Card ................................................73<br />

7.8.9 Comm. Parameters – Page 8 – With the Profibus Card................................................73<br />

7.8.10 Statistical Data – page 9 ...............................................................................................74<br />

8. Motor and Soft Starter Protection .........................................................................................75<br />

8.1 Adjustable Protection Functions ...............................................................................................75<br />

8.1.1 UNDER CURRENT .......................................................................................................75<br />

8.1.2 O/C –SHEAR PIN..........................................................................................................75<br />

8.1.3 OVERLOAD ..................................................................................................................75<br />

8.1.4 UNBALANCE CURRENT..............................................................................................75<br />

8.1.5 GROUND FAULT..........................................................................................................75<br />

8.1.6 UNDER/NO VOLTAGE .................................................................................................76<br />

8.1.7 OVER VOLTAGE ..........................................................................................................76<br />

8.1.8 LONG START TIME......................................................................................................76<br />

8.1.9 OPEN BYPASS.............................................................................................................76<br />

8.1.10 SET CURVE TO 0.........................................................................................................76<br />

8.1.11 PWR ON & NO STRT ...................................................................................................76<br />

8.1.12 MOTOR INSULATION ..................................................................................................76<br />

8.1.13 PHASE SEQUENCE.....................................................................................................76<br />

8.1.14 TOO MANY STARTS....................................................................................................77<br />

8.2 Non Adjustable Protection Functions........................................................................................77<br />

8.2.1 UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY.......................................................................................77<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


5 • Table of Contents<br />

8.2.2 PHASE LOSS................................................................................................................77<br />

8.2.3 WRONG PARAMETERS ..............................................................................................77<br />

8.2.4 STORAGE ERROR.......................................................................................................77<br />

8.2.5 S. SCR OR WR. CON...................................................................................................77<br />

8.2.6 OVER TEMPERATURE ................................................................................................78<br />

8.2.7 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 & EXTERNAL FAULT 2 ............................................................78<br />

8.3 Fault and Reset ........................................................................................................................78<br />

8.4 Auto Reset ................................................................................................................................78<br />

8.5 Timing Occurrence Table..........................................................................................................79<br />

9. Packing, Storage, Handling and Assembly..........................................................................80<br />

9.1 Packing Specification................................................................................................................80<br />

9.2 Storage .....................................................................................................................................80<br />

9.3 Handling....................................................................................................................................80<br />

9.4 Soft starter’s Assembly Procedure:...........................................................................................81<br />

9.4.1 Mechanical Assembly....................................................................................................81<br />

9.4.2 Power and Control Cable Connections .........................................................................82<br />

9.4.3 Power Cables Connection.............................................................................................82<br />

10. Commissioning and Operation Manual ................................................................................83<br />

10.1 Operational notes......................................................................................................................83<br />

10.2 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet............................................................................84<br />

10.2.1 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV) .........................84<br />

10.2.2 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up) ...............86<br />

10.2.3 Low Voltage Compartment............................................................................................88<br />

10.2.4 Fuses.............................................................................................................................89<br />

10.3 Standard Control Diagram ........................................................................................................91<br />

10.3.1 How Does it Operate?...................................................................................................94<br />

11. High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet ................................................................................96<br />

11.1 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, EPT-Tx Connected ...................................................96<br />

11.2 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, EPT-Tx Not Connected ............................................97<br />

11.3 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up, EPT-Tx Connected ........................................99<br />

11.4 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up, EPT-Tx Not Connected................................100<br />

12. Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing............................................................................102<br />

12.1 Accessories Required for LOW VOLTAGE Testing of the Starter and Cabinet......................102<br />

12.2 Notes and Warnings ...............................................................................................................102<br />

12.3 Low Voltage Test Procedure...................................................................................................103<br />

12.3.1 Current Gain Dip Switches Setting..............................................................................106<br />

12.3.2 Test Harness Installation.............................................................................................106<br />

12.3.2.1 Test Harness Installation in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV .............................................106<br />

12.3.2.2 Test Harness Installation in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up ...................................107<br />

13. Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor........................................................................108<br />

13.1 Special Attention Notes...........................................................................................................108<br />

13.2 Prior to Commissioning in Medium Voltage............................................................................108<br />

13.3 Medium Voltage Test Procedure ............................................................................................109<br />

13.4 Standard Starting Process......................................................................................................110<br />

13.5 Examples of Starting Curves ..................................................................................................111<br />

13.5.1 Light Loads - Pumps, Etc. ...........................................................................................111<br />

13.5.2 High Inertia Loads: Crushers, Centrifuges, Mixers, Etc. .............................................111<br />

13.5.3 Special Starting Using DUAL ADJUSTMENT .............................................................112<br />

13.5.3.1 Special Starting – Using DUAL ADJUSTMENT – Wiring Diagram ......................113<br />

13.5.4 Choosing a Suitable Pump Curve (Centrifugal Pumps) ..............................................113<br />

13.5.4.1 Starting Curve ......................................................................................................113<br />

13.5.4.2 Stopping Curve.....................................................................................................113<br />

13.5.4.3 FINAL TORQUE During Soft-Stopping a Pump Motor.........................................114<br />

______________________________________________________________________________________


6 • Table of Contents<br />

13.6 How to set MPS-3000 and DPM-10 when installed with <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN .......................................114<br />

14. Trouble Shooting ..................................................................................................................116<br />

14.1 In-Out Resistance and Cathode-Cathode Resistance............................................................116<br />

14.2 Rgk (thyristors Gate-Cathode) Resistances. ..........................................................................116<br />

14.3 Firing Test...............................................................................................................................117<br />

14.4 Low Voltage Test Trouble Shooting........................................................................................119<br />

14.5 Medium Voltage Trouble shooting ..........................................................................................123<br />

15. Spare Parts............................................................................................................................126<br />

16. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol) ..................................................................127<br />

16.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................127<br />

16.2 Basic Structure of the Serial Link Frame ................................................................................128<br />

16.3 SYNC (Silent Interval).............................................................................................................128<br />

16.4 Serial Link No. (Slave Address).............................................................................................128<br />

16.5 Function ..................................................................................................................................128<br />

16.6 List of Functions Supported By The <strong>HRVS</strong>DN........................................................................129<br />

16.7 Actual Data (3X References & 4X references) .......................................................................131<br />

16.8 Parameter Settings (4X References)......................................................................................134<br />

16.9 Control Register Write (4X Reference) ...................................................................................138<br />

16.10 Discrete Commands (Coils, 0x References)......................................................................139<br />

16.11 Discrete Hardwired Inputs (1x References).......................................................................142<br />

16.12 Diagnostics .........................................................................................................................142<br />

16.13 Exception Responses .........................................................................................................143<br />

17. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)..................................................................145<br />

17.1 Global Parameters:.................................................................................................................145<br />

17.2 Operation Mode in PROFIBUS:..............................................................................................145<br />

17.3 Description of the DPV0 (Cyclic) Frame: ................................................................................145<br />

17.3.1 Structure of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Receiving Frame ..............................................................146<br />

17.3.2 Structure of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Transmitting Frame ..........................................................146<br />

17.3.3 Choosing the Receiving DPV0 Registers....................................................................146<br />

17.3.3.1 Selection of the DPV0 Registers by the GSD ......................................................147<br />

17.3.3.2 Selection of the DPV0 Registers through Data Request (DPV1) .........................147<br />

17.3.3.3 Reading of the DPV0 (Cyclic) Registers via Data Request (DPV1) .....................149<br />

17.4 Operations that are Available in DPV1 ...................................................................................150<br />

17.4.1 Read and Write from Random Registers via Data Request........................................150<br />

17.5 Configure the PROFIBUS in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN............................................................................152<br />

17.6 Watch Dog Definition ..............................................................................................................152<br />

17.7 Numbers of actual data Register for (decimal) .......................................................................153<br />

17.8 Number of Setting Registers for Data Request.......................................................................157<br />

17.8.1 Main & protect. parameters.........................................................................................157<br />

17.9 Start Parameters.....................................................................................................................157<br />

17.10 Stop Parameters.................................................................................................................157<br />

17.11 Dual Adjust Parameters......................................................................................................158<br />

17.12 Fault Parameters ................................................................................................................158<br />

17.13 I/O Programming ................................................................................................................158<br />

17.14 Communication Parameters ...............................................................................................158<br />

17.15 Time Parameters ................................................................................................................159<br />

18. Parameters List.....................................................................................................................160<br />

19. General Information: ............................................................................................................163<br />

1. LIST OF FIGURES<br />

Figure 1- <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet Type IP31 (NEMA1) ............................................................................................10<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


7 • Table of Contents<br />

Figure 2- <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Chassis Type (IP00) .........................................................................................................10<br />

Figure 3 - Principle Diagram of Digital Medium Voltage Soft Starter (Bypass Preparations not Shown) ..........10<br />

Figure 4 - Phase Control of the Line Voltage Using Semiconductor (SCR) Elements ......................................10<br />

Figure 5 – Voltage Increase ..............................................................................................................................10<br />

Figure 6 – Torque Reduction.............................................................................................................................10<br />

Figure 7 – Current Limit.....................................................................................................................................10<br />

Figure 8 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit) ........................................................................................................13<br />

Figure 9 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit).....................................................................14<br />

Figure 10 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV with Line Contactor and Bypass Contactor ............15<br />

Figure 11 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up With Line Contactor and Bypass Contactor . 16<br />

Figure 12 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Power Section............................................................................................23<br />

Figure 13 – Control Module Input/Output ..........................................................................................................29<br />

Figure 14 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV - Phase Disassembly Accessories.............................................................39<br />

Figure 15 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module ..............................................................................................................40<br />

Figure 16 – Optional Analog PCB .....................................................................................................................43<br />

Figure 17 – Optional Insulation PCB Wiring......................................................................................................44<br />

Figure 18 – RU-7, Resistor Unit – Dimensional Drawing ..................................................................................44<br />

Figure 19 - Remote Key Pad, Connection Cable and Control Module. .............................................................45<br />

Figure 20 - Remote Key Pad - Dimensions.......................................................................................................45<br />

Figure 21 - Remote Key Pad - Mechanical Installation and Cut-out Dimensions.............................................46<br />

Figure 22 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Keypad ..............................................................................................................47<br />

Figure 23 – Eye Bolts Location on Top of the Cabinet......................................................................................80<br />

Figure 24 – Cabinet Lifting Using 4 Lifting Cables. Top angle, A, Should be ≤60° ..........................................81<br />

Figure 25 – Anchor Bolts Holes Location on the Base of the Cabinet at Level 0mm. .......................................81<br />

Figure 26 – Power and Control Cables Penetration to the Cabinet at Level 75mm ..........................................82<br />

Figure 27 – Power Cables Connection and Control Cables Routing.................................................................82<br />

Figure 28 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet – One Line Diagram......................................................84<br />

Figure 29 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet – Doors Closed..............................................................85<br />

Figure 30 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet – Doors Open ................................................................85<br />

Figure 31 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, Standard Cabinet – One Line Diagram ..........................................86<br />

Figure 32 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up Standard Cabinet – Doors Closed....................................................87<br />

Figure 33 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up Standard Cabinet – Doors Open ......................................................87<br />

Figure 34 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Low Voltage Compartment ............................................................................................88<br />

Figure 35 – Power Supply to Firing PCB (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Models up to 6600V). .....................................................89<br />

Figure 36 – Power Supply to Firing PCB (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Models From 10000V and up)........................................90<br />

Figure 37 – EPT-Rx Fuse Replacement Procedure ..........................................................................................90<br />

Figure 38 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN - Typical Control Wiring of Standard Cabinet ...............................................................91<br />

Figure 39 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – Preparations for High-pot Test................................................................96<br />

Figure 40 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L1 .......97<br />

Figure 41 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L2 .......98<br />

Figure 42 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L3 .......98<br />

Figure 43 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up – Preparations for High-pot Test.....................................................99<br />

Figure 44 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L1<br />

.................................................................................................................................................................100<br />

Figure 45 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L2<br />

.................................................................................................................................................................101<br />

Figure 46 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L3<br />

.................................................................................................................................................................101<br />

Figure 47 – Current Gain Dip Switches Location ............................................................................................106<br />

Figure 48 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx and Test Harness ....................................................................107<br />

Figure 49 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN From 10kV and up – EPT-Tx and Test Harness.........................................................107<br />

Figure 50 – Firing PCB – SCR#1 Gate-Cathode Testing ................................................................................116<br />

Figure 51 – DPV0 parameters (Cyclic parameters).........................................................................................146<br />

Figure 52 – Updating the register number that will show at DPV0 (by Data Request).................................... 148<br />

Figure 53 – Reading the register number that is shown in the DPV0 (cyclic) list ............................................149<br />

Figure 54 – Choosing register number 80 hex ................................................................................................150<br />

Figure 55 – Reading 4 following register by Data Request (DPV1) ................................................................151<br />

______________________________________________________________________________________


8 • Safety & Warnings<br />

2. SAFETY & WARNINGS<br />

2.1 Safety<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

Read this <strong>manual</strong> carefully before operating the equipment and follow its<br />

instructions.<br />

Installation, operation and maintenance should be in strict accordance<br />

with this <strong>manual</strong>, national codes and good practice.<br />

Installation or operation not performed in strict accordance with these<br />

instructions will void manufacturer’s warranty.<br />

Disconnect all power inputs before servicing the soft starter and/or the<br />

motor.<br />

After installation, check and verify that no parts (bolts, washers, etc.)<br />

have fallen into the Power Section (IP00) of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

2.2 Attention<br />

This product was designed for compliance with IEC 60947-4-2 for class A<br />

1<br />

equipment and EN 50178.<br />

2 For further information, see the Technical Specifications.<br />

2.3 Warnings<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

Internal components and PCBs are at mains potential when the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN is connected to mains. This voltage is extremely dangerous and<br />

contact with it will cause death or severe injury.<br />

When the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is connected to mains full voltage may appear on<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s output terminals and motor’s terminals, even if control<br />

voltage is disconnected and motor is stopped.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be grounded to ensure correct operation, safety and<br />

to prevent damage.<br />

Check that power factor capacitors are not connected to the output side<br />

of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN (U, V, W).<br />

Also make sure that power factor capacitors are not connected to the<br />

bypass preparation bus bars (L1B, L2B, L3B when exist)<br />

The company reserves the right to make any improvements or modifications to its products without<br />

prior notice.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


3. INTRODUCTION<br />

3.1 Why Solcon? Why Soft Starters?<br />

9 • Introduction<br />

Three-phase AC induction motors are commonly used in a wide variety of drive applications. Due to their<br />

starting characteristics, in many cases these motors cannot be connected directly to the power supply system.<br />

When starting Direct On Line (DOL) the motor can see a very high surge current reaching up to 6 times (and<br />

more…) the rated motor current. This excessive current puts stress on the supply system and the switchgear.<br />

Also, when starting DOL, a very high peak torque can occur, stressing the driven motor and the mechanical<br />

system including auxiliary power transmission parts (V-belt, gears, etc.).<br />

There are several methods for reducing the damaging effects of this excessive starting current. Conventional<br />

methods include reactors and autotransformers. But these methods only allow the voltage to be reduced in<br />

steps whereas a soft starter provides step-free acceleration of the drive system by continuously increasing the<br />

voltage over a selected period of time. This approach to starting minimizes the effect of high inrush current on<br />

the supply system, the motor and the driven load.<br />

Soft starters provide the following benefits:<br />

• Reduced starting current, eliminates voltage drops and dips of the supply network<br />

• Smoother acceleration of loads, eliminates process or product damage<br />

• Extended lifetime of all mechanical components, e.g. eliminates gearbox damage and results in less<br />

maintenance & downtime<br />

• Extended motor life<br />

• Reduced maintenance and operating costs<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN soft starter represents a logical extension of the Solcon soft starter product range into medium<br />

voltage applications.<br />

With <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, Solcon presents an innovative standard product that provides a flexible, low cost alternative<br />

to fixed speed (DOL) starting.<br />

Designed for use with standard medium voltage three-phase squirrel cage induction motors as well as<br />

synchronous motors, this high-performance digital soft starter ensures smooth acceleration and deceleration.<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is available in all standard internationally recognized medium voltage ratings: 2.3kV, 3.3kV, 4.16kV,<br />

6kV and 6.6kV, 10kV, 11kV, 13.2kV, 13.8kV and 15kV.<br />

The standard current output range capability is from 200kW to 27MW.<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is designed and built to meet international standards including:<br />

• IEC • EN • DIN VDE • NEMA • UL/CUL • IEEE<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN soft starters are manufactured at the highest quality level. The entire design, production and<br />

delivery process, (i.e. construction, manufacturing, order processing and logistics delivery center) have been<br />

certified DIN ISO 9001.2000.<br />

The enclosed versions of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN are provided as ready-to-connect cabinet enclosed type units<br />

(example shown in Figure 1) or - for OEM only - chassis type OEM kits (example shown in Figure 2) are<br />

available for building into custom enclosures or other relevant equipment (note: the complete interface<br />

engineering is the responsibility of the user).<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


10 • Introduction<br />

Figure 1- <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet Type IP31 (NEMA1)<br />

3.2 How Soft Starters Work?<br />

Figure 2- <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Chassis Type (IP00)<br />

By using thyristors (SCRs) in a phase angle control mode, reduced voltage control can be achieved. Phase<br />

control makes it possible to gradually increase the motor terminal voltage from an initial set point up to the<br />

system supply voltage level. The related starting current and the starting torque can be optimally adjusted to<br />

the motor/load conditions.<br />

Figure 3 - Principle Diagram of Digital Medium Voltage Soft<br />

Starter (Bypass Preparations not Shown)<br />

Figure 4 - Phase Control of the Line Voltage Using<br />

Semiconductor (SCR) Elements<br />

Figure 5 shows a principal voltage increase curve. Figure 6 demonstrates the torque reduction compared to the<br />

DOL torque. Figure 7 demonstrates typical behavior of motor current.<br />

Figure 5 – Voltage Increase Figure 6 – Torque Reduction Figure 7 – Current Limit<br />

In addition, the Solcon <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN soft starters provide the "soft stopping" function as a standard feature.<br />

Similar to the reduced voltage start, a stop command gradually reduces the motor voltage over time until the<br />

motor stops. Abrupt stopping is avoided, a specific advantage in pumping applications to prevent the<br />

damaging effects of water hammer and on conveyor belts where the load may be damaged by an abrupt stop.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


Main Features, Options and Advantages<br />

Advantages at a Glance<br />

Complete line of 60-1,200A, 2,300-15,000V as<br />

standard products<br />

Customized soft starters (consult the factory<br />

for details)<br />

Heavy duty, fully rated design<br />

Starting capacity of 400% of FLC for 30<br />

seconds at a rated ambient temperature of 50°C<br />

Preparation for bypass - to maintain protection<br />

when bypass is closed<br />

Robust construction<br />

Superior starting & stopping characteristics<br />

Comprehensive motor protection package<br />

User friendly<br />

Unique protection for corrosive environments<br />

Generator ready - auto frequency tracking<br />

Sustains variations of 45-65Hz while starting<br />

Unique built in optional features including:<br />

Motor insulation tester<br />

RS 485 comm. Modbus / Profibus<br />

Analog output<br />

Relay PCB for comm. control<br />

Tacho feedback<br />

Multi-start (standard)and Multi-soft<br />

stop (optional) capability<br />

Synchronous motor excitation system<br />

control<br />

Remote display<br />

Standard Ratings<br />

2.3kV, 4.16kV, 6kV, 6.6kV, 10kV,11kV,<br />

13.2kV, 13.8kV, 15kV<br />

Starting & Stopping<br />

Soft start & soft stop<br />

Current limit<br />

Pump control program<br />

Torque and current control for optimized<br />

starting & stopping process<br />

Dual adjustments - two starting & stopping<br />

characteristics<br />

Advanced pulse start<br />

Linear acceleration<br />

11 • Introduction<br />

Motor & Starter Protection<br />

Too many starts<br />

Long start time (stall)<br />

Shear-pin<br />

Electronic overload with selectable curves<br />

according to IEC classes or NEMA classes<br />

Under current with adjustable delay<br />

Unbalance current with adjustable delay<br />

Ground fault with adjustable delay<br />

Phase loss & phase sequence<br />

Under, over & no voltage<br />

Load loss (motor not connected)<br />

Shorted SCR<br />

Starter over-temperature<br />

Displays LCD & LEDs<br />

Illuminated LCD - 2 lines x 16 characters<br />

Selectable languages: English, German, French<br />

and Spanish (Chinese and Russian - optional)<br />

Two display modes for basic and advanced<br />

applications<br />

Friendly operation with default parameters<br />

Eight LEDs for quick operational status<br />

Statistical data including:<br />

Total run time<br />

Total number of starts<br />

Total number of trips<br />

Last start current<br />

Last start time<br />

Last 10 trips with time stamp<br />

Current at trip<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


12 • Introduction<br />

Unique Built-in Options<br />

Analog output, related to the motor's current,<br />

programmable as 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, 0-20mA or<br />

related to the motor’s rated power<br />

Motor insulation test - a unique feature for<br />

submersible pumps, motors installed in harsh<br />

environments, etc<br />

The system measures motor insulation when<br />

motor is not running.<br />

Two programmable levels are available:<br />

Alarm level, adjustable 0.2-5 Mohm<br />

Start disable level, adjustable 0.2-5Mohm,<br />

preventing starting when insulation is below<br />

acceptable levels<br />

Special tacho feedback circuitry<br />

Modbus RTU - enables setting, control &<br />

supervision<br />

Profibus DP – enables setting, control &<br />

supervision<br />

Relay PCB – enables starting the application<br />

when the soft starter is installed in a cabinet via<br />

communication, and to control the excitation<br />

system of a synchronous motor<br />

Remote display allows the panel builder to<br />

mount the keypad of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN in a remote<br />

location of the Control Module. A standard length<br />

of 1.5m cable length is supplied<br />

Multi-soft stop special software allows to soft<br />

stop motors when a multi-start application is<br />

applied.<br />

Unique External Options<br />

Customized tailor-made design of a cabinet<br />

Advanced motor protection MPS-3000<br />

Digital multi-meter for advanced measurement<br />

capabilities - DPM-10<br />

Motor Insulation Protection – MIP-6 for<br />

advanced tracking of motor insulation level over<br />

more than 20 years<br />

Line and Bypass Contactors/VCBs<br />

Fuses and disconnectors<br />

Capacitors for power factor correction<br />

Auxiliary Relays<br />

Three standard programmable relays (each relay<br />

with one C.O. 8A, 220VAC contacts)<br />

Immediate with adjustable on and off delays<br />

(can be dedicated for too many starts pre-alarm<br />

relay)<br />

End of Acceleration, with adjustable on<br />

delay<br />

Fault, programmable as fault or fault-fail safe<br />

operation.<br />

Low motor insulation alarm (optional relay)<br />

Applications - Industrial<br />

Pumps<br />

Hydraulic systems<br />

Fans and blowers<br />

Compressors<br />

Conveyors<br />

Applications - Marine & Offshore<br />

Water, ballast and fire-fighting pumps<br />

Refrigeration chillers and compressors<br />

Hydraulic pumps and power packs<br />

Thrusters<br />

Main propulsion motors<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


13 • Technical Data<br />

4. TECHNICAL DATA<br />

4.1 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit)<br />

Power Section and<br />

Connection Harness<br />

Control Module<br />

Firing<br />

Transformer<br />

EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx<br />

Figure 8 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit)<br />

The IP00 unit (OEM kit) is available for building into custom enclosures or other relevant equipment.<br />

It consists of the following (refer to Figure 8 above):<br />

• Power Section consists of the 3 identical phase stacks, firing PCBs, power supplies to the firing PCBs<br />

(in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up power supplies to the firing PCBs are separated from the Power<br />

Section), 3 CTs and the connection harness to the low voltage compartment (including copper wires<br />

and fiber optic wires). The Power Section is installed in the medium voltage compartment of the<br />

cabinet.<br />

• Control Module is the “brain” of the soft starter. It consists of the main CPU PCB, fireboard PCB,<br />

power supply, optional PCBs (when ordered) and input/output interface terminals.<br />

The Control Module for <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is identical for all ratings and suitable for mounting in the L.V.<br />

compartment of the cabinet which should be fully segregated from the M.V. compartment.<br />

Interposing relays should be connected to all <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN auxiliary contacts, three relays must be<br />

incorporated: Immediate, End of Acceleration and Fault.<br />

• Firing Transformer. This transformer is applicable for 115VAC or 230VAC control voltages.<br />

For <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN controlled by DC control voltages - DC power supply is supplied – for details consult the<br />

factory.<br />

The Firing transformer is installed in the low voltage compartment of the cabinet and supplies control<br />

power to the firing PCBs located in the Power Section of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN in the medium voltage<br />

compartment of the cabinet.<br />

• EPT-Tx (transmitter) and EPT-Rx (receiver) are used instead of the traditional voltage transformer to<br />

measure the input voltage.<br />

The EPT-Tx is installed in the medium voltage compartment and is connected to the mains bus bars<br />

downstream from the Line Contactor.<br />

The EPT-Rx is installed in the low voltage compartment of the cabinet.<br />

The EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx are connected by 2 fiber optic wires which are part of the connection<br />

harness.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


14 • Technical Data<br />

4.2 Typical Connection of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit)<br />

Figure 9 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 Unit (OEM Kit)<br />

Notes:<br />

• Figure 9 shows a typical connection of an <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 unit (OEM kit) of up to 6.6kV with a control voltage<br />

of 115/230VAC. For connection diagrams for other models consult the factory.<br />

• L1B, L2B, L3B bus bars are only available in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


4.3 Typical Connection of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN in a Cabinet<br />

4.3.1 Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV<br />

15 • Technical Data<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be connected with a Line Contactor and a Bypass Contactor as demonstrated in Figure<br />

10.<br />

Figure 10 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV with Line Contactor and Bypass Contactor<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


16 • Technical Data<br />

4.3.2 Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be connected with a Line Contactor and a Bypass Contactor as demonstrated in Figure<br />

11.<br />

Figure 11 – Typical Connection of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up With Line Contactor and Bypass Contactor<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


17 • Technical Data<br />

4.4 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Selection<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN should be selected in accordance with the criteria of motor current and starting conditions.<br />

4.4.1 Motor Current and Starting Conditions<br />

Select the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN according to the motor's Full Load Ampere (FLA) - as indicated on its nameplate (even if<br />

the motor will not be fully loaded).<br />

Soft Starter Full Load Current (FLC) must be ≥Motor’s Full Load Ampere (FLA).<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is designed to operate under the following maximum conditions:<br />

Ambient<br />

Temperature<br />

[°C]<br />

Max. Starting Current<br />

[A]<br />

Max. Starting<br />

Time at 400%<br />

FLC<br />

[sec]<br />

50 400%xFLC 30<br />

Max. starts per hour: 2 starts per hour at maximum ratings.<br />

4.4.2 PIV (Peak Inverse Voltage)<br />

Thyristors PIV rating, internal circuitry and insulation define the following voltage levels:<br />

2,300V, 3,300V, 4,160V, 6,600V, 10,000V, 11,000V, 13,800V and 15,000V.<br />

Each soft starter is suitable for 50/60Hz.<br />

PIV level is rated at 3 times the rated voltage or higher.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


18 • Technical Data<br />

4.4.3 Rated Currents Frame Sizes<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


19 • Technical Data<br />

4.5 Ordering Information<br />

4.5.1 Ordering IP00 Unit (OEM kit)<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN (IP00)<br />

Customer Name:<br />

Internal Order<br />

No:<br />

Solcon cat. No.:<br />

Rev.:<br />

Project Name:<br />

Contact<br />

Person:<br />

Tel:<br />

Fax:<br />

E-mail:<br />

Motor Name Plate:<br />

Application:<br />

Qty:<br />

Delivery:<br />

Order number<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

Rated<br />

current<br />

Voltage<br />

Control<br />

voltage<br />

supply<br />

Control Input<br />

supply Options Lexan<br />

3M-Modbus<br />

See below<br />

See below<br />

115VAC<br />

230VAC<br />

110VDC<br />

125VDC<br />

220VDC<br />

24VDC<br />

115VAC<br />

230VAC<br />

110VDC<br />

125VDC<br />

220VDC<br />

3P-Profibus<br />

5-analog Card<br />

D-remote display<br />

RU-Russian characters.<br />

ROC-Chinese characters<br />

Relay-Relay PCB<br />

NLR-Special software for<br />

Multi soft stop applications<br />

S<br />

RU<br />

N<br />

No. Main Components Model - P/N QTY.<br />

1.<br />

2.<br />

3.<br />

4.<br />

5.<br />

6.<br />

7.<br />

8.<br />

9.<br />

10.<br />

11.<br />

MV Soft Starter Specification<br />

No. ITEM Options Specify<br />

1.<br />

2.<br />

Mains Voltage<br />

2300, 3300, 4160, 6000, 6600, 10000,11000 , 13200,<br />

13800,15000<br />

At 2300-4160V: 60,110, 200, 320, 400, 700, 800,1000, 1200<br />

Starter FLC (Amp.) At 6000-15000V: 70,140,250,300,400,500,700,800,1000,<br />

1200<br />

3. Control Supply Voltage 115VAC, 230VAC, 110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC, 24VDC<br />

4. Control Input Voltage 115VAC, 230VAC, 110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC, 24VDC/AC<br />

5. Test Voltage 230, 400, 500, 600, 690<br />

6. Control wires type<br />

7. Harness Side Left/Right<br />

8. Relay Card NO / YES<br />

9. Analogue Output NO / YES<br />

10. MODBUS Communication NO / YES<br />

11. PROFIBUS Communication NO / YES<br />

12. Insulation Test Module NO / YES<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


20 • Technical Data<br />

MV Soft Starter Specification<br />

No. ITEM Options Specify<br />

13. Optional loose<br />

Components<br />

YES/NO<br />

13.1 Extended Split Phase<br />

13.2 Motor Protection Relay<br />

(Refer to Relay Ordering<br />

MPS-6 , MPS 3000-P/C<br />

Information Data)<br />

13.3 Digital Panel Meter DPM NO / YES<br />

13.4 Line Contactor 2300-6600V<br />

J.C. model<br />

MVC/SVC/Toshiba model<br />

CV-6HA<br />

13.5 Bypass Contactor 2300-<br />

6600V J.C. model<br />

MVC/SVC/Toshiba model<br />

CV-6HA<br />

NO / YES (Voltage & Current per selected starter rating)<br />

NO / YES (Voltage & Current per selected starter rating)<br />

13.6 Auxiliary Contacts<br />

13.7 Coil Control Voltage ACV:120,240 DCV:125,250<br />

13.8 Line Contactor 7200-<br />

12000V<br />

Toshiba model CV-10HA<br />

13.9 Bypass Contactor 7200-<br />

12000V<br />

Toshiba model CV-10HA<br />

NO / YES (Voltage & Current per selected starter rating)<br />

NO / YES (Voltage & Current per selected starter rating)<br />

13.1 Auxiliary Contacts 4NO+3NC , 6NO+5NC<br />

13.1 ACV:110,115,120,125,220,230,240,380,400,415,440,500<br />

Coil Control Voltage<br />

DCV:24,60,110,124.220<br />

13.1 MIP – Motor Insulation<br />

Protection<br />

NO / YES<br />

14. Packing Sea fright, Air fright, No<br />

15. Labeling<br />

16. <strong>Instruction</strong> Manuals<br />

17. Ex-Factory Delivery<br />

18.<br />

Ship to Box Marking<br />

19. Special Notes<br />

1. 7.<br />

2. 8.<br />

20. Spare Parts<br />

3. 9.<br />

4. 10.<br />

5. 11.<br />

6. 12.<br />

Issued by: Date :<br />

Approved by (Sales Manager) : Date :<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


21 • Technical Data<br />

4.5.2 Ordering a Cabinet Installed Soft Starter<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN (Cabinet enclosed)<br />

Cabinet Manufacturer: Solcon<br />

Customer Name:<br />

Internal Order<br />

No:<br />

Solcon cat. No.:<br />

Rev.:<br />

Project Name:<br />

Initiator (to be<br />

indicated on<br />

drawings)<br />

Contact Person:<br />

Tel:<br />

Fax:<br />

E-mail:<br />

Motor Name Plate:<br />

Application:<br />

Qty:<br />

Delivery:<br />

Order number<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

Rated<br />

current<br />

Voltage<br />

Control<br />

voltage<br />

supply<br />

Control Input<br />

supply Options Lexan<br />

3M-Modbus<br />

See below<br />

See below<br />

115VAC<br />

230VAC<br />

110VDC<br />

125VDC<br />

220VDC<br />

24VDC<br />

115VAC<br />

230VAC<br />

110VDC<br />

125VDC<br />

220VDC<br />

3P-Profibus<br />

5-analog Card<br />

D-remote display<br />

RU-Russian characters.<br />

ROC-Chinese characters<br />

Relay-Relay PCB<br />

NLR-Special software for<br />

Multi soft stop applications<br />

S<br />

RU<br />

N<br />

No. Main Components Model - P/N QTY.<br />

1.<br />

2.<br />

3.<br />

4.<br />

5.<br />

6.<br />

7.<br />

8.<br />

9.<br />

10.<br />

11.<br />

MV Soft Starter Specification<br />

No. ITEM Options Specify<br />

1.<br />

2.<br />

Mains Voltage<br />

2300, 3300, 4160, 6000, 6600, 10000,11000 , 13200,<br />

13800,15000<br />

At 2300-4160V: 60,110, 200, 320, 400, 700, 800,1000, 1200<br />

Starter FLC (Amp.) At 6000-15000V: 70,140,250,300,400,500,700,800,1000,<br />

1200<br />

3. Control Supply Voltage 115VAC, 230VAC, 110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC, 24VDC<br />

4. Control Input Voltage 115VAC, 230VAC, 110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC, 24VDC/AC<br />

5. Test Voltage 230, 400, 500, 600, 690<br />

6. Control Wiring Standard - Fig. 1 (see <strong>manual</strong>) / Other-drawings attached<br />

7. Control wires type<br />

8. Relay Card NO / YES<br />

9. Analogue Output NO / YES<br />

10. MODBUS Communication NO / YES<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


22 • Technical Data<br />

MV Soft Starter Specification<br />

No. ITEM Options Specify<br />

11. PROFIBUS Communication NO / YES<br />

12. Insulation Test Module NO / YES<br />

13. Enclosure Class IP31,IP32,IP54,IP65 Keypad - Behind glass Window<br />

14. Motor Insulation Protection<br />

(MIP)<br />

YES/NO<br />

15. Short Circuit Capacity<br />

16. Paint 80µM RAL 7032 Other<br />

17. Incoming Cabinet NO / YES<br />

18. Input Cables Top / Bottom<br />

19. Output Cables Top / Bottom<br />

20. Door Opening Open to the Left / Right<br />

21. Door Locks & Stoppers YES/NO<br />

22. Mains On Load Switch<br />

23. Main Fuse + Fuse Holder<br />

24. Blown fuse indicator (strikerpin)<br />

25. Line Contactor NO / YES<br />

26. Bypass Contactor NO / YES<br />

27. Capacitor Bank Contactor NO / YES<br />

28. Provision for Bank<br />

Connections<br />

NO / YES<br />

29. Motor Protection Relay MPS-6, MPS 3000-P/C<br />

30. Lamp Test System NO / YES<br />

31. Digital Panel Meter NO / DPM-10<br />

32. Space heater NO / YES<br />

33. Cooling Fan NO / YES<br />

34. Special Thick Painting NO / YES<br />

35. Packing Sea fright, Air fright, No<br />

36. Labeling<br />

36.1. Solcon cabinet logo NO / YES<br />

37. <strong>Instruction</strong> Manuals Standard – 2 sets at door pocket<br />

38. Approvals<br />

38.1. Marine Design Review NO / YES<br />

38.2. Requested Date<br />

39. Drawings for Approval<br />

40. Delivery - Chassis<br />

41. Delivery – Final<br />

42. Special Notes<br />

1. 7.<br />

43.<br />

Spare<br />

Parts<br />

2. 8.<br />

3. 9.<br />

4. 10.<br />

5. 11.<br />

6. 12.<br />

44. Packing <strong>Instruction</strong>s<br />

45. Marking<br />

Issued by: Date :<br />

Approved by (Sales Manager) : Date :<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


23 • Technical Data<br />

4.6 Power Connections Description<br />

Refer to Figure 12 below<br />

Indication Description Remarks<br />

L1, L2, L3 Connection to mains voltage up to<br />

15,000V<br />

Thyristor’s PIV rating, internal circuitry and insulation<br />

defines the following voltage levels:<br />

2,300V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />

4,160V +10% /-15% 50/60Hz<br />

6,000V +10% /-15% 50/60Hz<br />

6,600V +10% /-15% 50/60Hz<br />

10,000V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />

11,000V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />

13,200V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />

13,800V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />

15,000V +10% / -15% 50/60Hz<br />

Each <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is suitable for one of the above<br />

L1b, L2b, L3b<br />

(models up to<br />

6.6kV only)<br />

Preparation for bypass<br />

connection<br />

levels & for 50/60 Hz.<br />

Bypass preparation is standard in all <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

models up to 6.6kV.<br />

All <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN models must be operated with a<br />

Bypass Contactor.<br />

Bus bars and Bypass Contactor must be arranged to<br />

maintain current flow through the internal CTs after<br />

end of the acceleration process. Otherwise, current<br />

protection of the soft starter will not function.<br />

U, V, W Connection to motor Note:<br />

Never connect power factor capacitors to soft starter<br />

output.<br />

Power Factor capacitors, if required should be<br />

connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN line side (mains).<br />

G Connection to ground For proper operation and for safety reasons the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Power Section must be properly<br />

grounded.<br />

Figure 12 illustrates the Power Section of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN models up to 6.6kV.<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN models from 10kV and up have no preparation for bypass (bypass must be performed in the<br />

cabinet), CTs are mounted externally to the Power Section and power supplies to the firing PCBs are mounted<br />

externally to the Power Section.<br />

Figure 12 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Power Section<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


24 • Technical Data<br />

4.7 Control Connections Description<br />

Refer to Figure 13 page 29<br />

Indication Description Remarks<br />

Terminal 1 Control voltage - phase (positive –<br />

for DC control)<br />

The control voltage operates the electronic circuitry<br />

and the auxiliary relay that controls the firing relay<br />

Terminal 3 Control voltage - neutral (return –<br />

for DC control)<br />

The available control voltages are:<br />

115V for 115V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />

230V for 230V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />

24VDC for 24VDC +10%/ -15% DC<br />

110VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />

125VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />

220VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />

Note:<br />

It is recommended that terminals 1-3 be<br />

continuously connected to the control voltage.<br />

Terminal 2 Firing control An internal relay connects the control voltage from<br />

terminal 1 to terminal 2 when firing is required<br />

during Soft Start and Soft Stop. Typically external<br />

relay controlled by this terminal connect the firing<br />

transformer which feed the firing system.<br />

Terminal 4<br />

Terminal 5<br />

Terminal 6<br />

Input – STOP command.<br />

• Input from a N.C. contact<br />

• To stop the motor, disconnect<br />

Control Input voltage from<br />

terminal 4 for at least 250mSec.<br />

(no SOFT STOP)<br />

Input – SOFT STOP command.<br />

• Input from a N.C. contact<br />

• To SOFT STOP the motor<br />

disconnect Control Input voltage<br />

from terminal 5 for at least<br />

250mS<br />

Note:<br />

If SOFT STOP is not required,<br />

connect a jumper between<br />

terminals 4 and 5.<br />

Input – START command.<br />

• Input from a N.O. contact.<br />

• To SOFT START the motor,<br />

connect Control Input voltage to<br />

terminal 4 for at least 500mSec.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Motor will start only if STOP<br />

(terminal 4) and SOFT STOP<br />

(terminal 5) terminals are<br />

connected to Control Input<br />

voltage.<br />

• To reset a fault the START<br />

command must be removed.<br />

(except for UNDERCURRENT<br />

protection)<br />

• The soft starter ignores start<br />

within 3 seconds after stop. Wait<br />

at least 3 seconds before<br />

restarting.<br />

• Control Input voltage (STOP, SOFT STOP,<br />

START, terminal inputs 7 and 8) can be the same<br />

as Control Supply (terminals 1, 3) or voltage from<br />

a different source.<br />

• The Control Inputs are opto-coupled and isolated<br />

from the microprocessor circuitry.<br />

Control Input voltages available:<br />

115V for 115V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />

230V for 230V +10%/ -15% 50/60Hz<br />

110VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />

125VDC for 110V +10%/ -15% DC<br />

220VDC for 220V +10%/ -15% DC<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


25 • Technical Data<br />

Indication Description Remarks<br />

Terminal 7 Programmable input –<br />

Refer to section 4.7.1 page 30.<br />

TEST / RESET/MULTI<br />

SOFT STOP*<br />

(MULTI SOFT STOP<br />

applicable when special<br />

software for multi soft stop<br />

is ordered)<br />

Terminal 8 Programmable input –<br />

Refer to section 4.7.2 page 30.<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT /<br />

RESET<br />

Terminal 9 Common to terminals 4-8. This terminal is a reference for terminals 4, 5, 6, 7<br />

& 8.<br />

Note:<br />

When Control Supply and Control Input voltage are<br />

from the same source, connect a jumper between<br />

terminals 3 and 9.<br />

Terminal 10 Programmable IMM/<br />

# STRT PREAL (N.O.)<br />

IMM/# STRT PREAL is the immediate/# of starts<br />

pre-alarm output relay.<br />

Terminal 11 Programmable IMM/<br />

# STRT PREAL (N.C.)<br />

• Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max.<br />

• Selection between functions is made from the<br />

Terminal 12<br />

Terminal 13<br />

Terminal 14<br />

Terminal 15<br />

Terminal 16<br />

Terminal 17<br />

Terminal 18<br />

Programmable IMM/<br />

# STRT PREAL (Common)<br />

Programmable Fault<br />

Output relay (N.O.)<br />

Programmable Fault<br />

Output relay (N.C.)<br />

Programmable Fault<br />

Output relay (Common)<br />

Programmable End of<br />

Acceleration (Run) Output relay<br />

(N.O.)<br />

Programmable End of<br />

Acceleration (Run) Output relay<br />

(N.C.)<br />

Programmable End of<br />

Acceleration (Run) Output<br />

relay (Common)<br />

keypad or through the communication.<br />

• Refer to section 7.8.7 page 71 for IMM/ # STRT<br />

PREAL programming.<br />

• Refer to section 4.7.3 page 30 for more details.<br />

Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. changes<br />

its position upon fault.<br />

The contact is programmable to function as FAULT<br />

or FAULT-FAIL SAFE.<br />

When the FAULT function is selected, the relay is<br />

energized upon fault. The contact returns to its<br />

original position when one of the following occurs:<br />

• The fault has been removed and <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN was<br />

reset<br />

• Disconnection of Control Supply<br />

When the FAULT-FAIL SAFE function is selected,<br />

the relay is energized immediately when the<br />

Control Supply is connected and de-energizes<br />

when one of the following occurs:<br />

• Fault<br />

• Disconnection of Control Supply<br />

Refer to section 7.8.7 page 71 for FAULT RELAY<br />

TYPE programming.<br />

Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. changes<br />

its position at the end of acceleration, after an<br />

adjustable time delay (Contact Delay), 0 – 120 sec.<br />

The contact returns to its original position on SOFT<br />

STOP or STOP signals, on FAULT condition, or<br />

upon voltage outage.<br />

The End of Acceleration contact (Run) can be used<br />

for:<br />

• Closing a Bypass Contactor. Use an interposing<br />

relay.<br />

• Activating a valve after compressor has reached<br />

full speed<br />

• Loading a conveyor after motor reached full<br />

speed.<br />

Refer to section 7.8.3 page 60 for RUN CONTACT<br />

DLY programming<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


26 • Technical Data<br />

Indication Description Remarks<br />

Terminal 19 External Fault #1 input Input from a N.O. contact that is connected<br />

between terminal 19 and a control input voltage<br />

that is referred to terminal 21.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will trip 2 seconds after the contact<br />

closes.<br />

Terminal 20 External Fault #2 input Same as terminal 19.<br />

Terminal 21 Common to terminals 19<br />

and 20.<br />

This terminal is a reference for terminals 19 and<br />

20.<br />

Note:<br />

When Control Supply and Control Input voltage to<br />

the external faults input are from the same source,<br />

connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 21.<br />

Terminal 22 No connection (optional) • Standard RS485, half duplex with Modbus<br />

Terminal 23 RS-485 communication (-)<br />

(optional)<br />

Terminal 24 RS-485 communication (+)<br />

(optional)<br />

Terminal 25<br />

Terminal 26<br />

Terminal 27<br />

Programmable Insulation Alarm<br />

Output relay (Common) (optional)<br />

Programmable Insulation Alarm<br />

Output relay (N.O.) (optional)<br />

Programmable Insulation<br />

Alarm Output relay (N.C.)<br />

(optional)<br />

protocol, baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 BPS.<br />

• Twisted shielded pair should be used.<br />

Connect shield to ground on the PLC/Computer<br />

side.<br />

• Terminals 4 & 5 must be wired to Control Supply<br />

for operation in communication mode (refer to<br />

section 5.11 page 36 for wiring diagram).<br />

• Up 32 units can be connected for Modbus RS485<br />

communication. For reliable communication, units<br />

should be installed in the vicinity of 200m<br />

maximum, from the first to the last unit.<br />

• Refer to section 7.8.8 page 73 for programming.<br />

• Refer to the Modbus communication <strong>manual</strong><br />

section 16 page 127.<br />

Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. is<br />

energized when the motor insulation level<br />

decreases below the Insulation Alarm level.<br />

The relay is de-energized and the alarm will<br />

disappear if one of the following occurs:<br />

• The insulation level returns to normal for more<br />

than 60 seconds<br />

• <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN resets<br />

• Control Supply disconnection<br />

Refer to section 7.8.6 on page 69 for more details<br />

and programming.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Insulation test can be performed only when main<br />

voltage is not connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN,<br />

(upstream isolation device must be opened.)<br />

• For correct operation of Insulation test, it is<br />

important that the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is properly<br />

grounded and that the Control Module is properly<br />

fastened to the Power Section.<br />

• Insulation test option and analog output option<br />

can not be applied together.<br />

Terminal Ground (optional) Leave this terminal not connected. Ground the<br />

shield of the analog output signal at the recipient<br />

side.<br />

Analog output (0-10VDC or 0-20mA or 4-20mA)<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


27 • Technical Data<br />

Indication Description Remarks<br />

Terminal out(-) Analog output (-) (optional) reflects motor current and is related to 2xFLA. i.e.,<br />

Full scale (10VDC or 20mA) is related to 2xFLA.<br />

Or<br />

reflects motor power and is related to Pn i.e., Full<br />

scale (10VDC or 20mA) is related to motor rated<br />

power. Motor rated power is set in the MAIN &<br />

PROTECT parameter. Refer to section 7.8.2 page<br />

55.<br />

Terminal out(+) Analog output (+) (optional) • Refer to section 6.5 page 43 for analog output dip<br />

switch setting.<br />

• Refer to section 7.8.7 page 71 for analog output<br />

programming.<br />

Terminal 31<br />

Terminal 32<br />

Terminal 33<br />

Start command output relay (N.O.)<br />

(optional)<br />

Start command output relay (N.O.)<br />

(optional)<br />

Up to Speed Output relay<br />

(N.O.) (optional)<br />

Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. closes<br />

upon start command via communication. (Modbus<br />

or Profibus)<br />

The contact opens on SOFT STOP or STOP<br />

commands via communication (Modbus or<br />

Profibus).<br />

This contact is used to control the cabinet via the<br />

communication (i.e. closing the Line Contactor).<br />

Voltage free 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA max. changes<br />

its position at the end of acceleration, after current<br />

is reduced below a programmable current and a<br />

time delay.<br />

The Up to Speed relay remains latched until the<br />

motor stops.<br />

Terminal 34 Up to Speed Output relay (N.C.)<br />

(optional)<br />

The Up to Speed relay is used to control the<br />

excitation system of a synchronous motor.<br />

Terminal 35 Up to Speed Output relay<br />

(Common) (optional)<br />

Refer to section 7.8.3 page 60 for RUN CONTACT<br />

DLY programming<br />

D-9 connector Profibus communication (optional) • Profibus DPV0 and DPV1, up to 12 MBPS.<br />

• D type 9 pin connector is applied.<br />

• Control, monitoring and setting parameters can<br />

be achieved via the Profibus connection.<br />

• Setting is possible only when DPV1 is<br />

implemented.<br />

• Refer to section 7.8.9 page 73 for programming.<br />

• Refer to the Profibus communication <strong>manual</strong><br />

section 17 page 145.<br />

Fiber optic<br />

output #1<br />

Fiber optic<br />

output #3<br />

Fiber optic<br />

output #5<br />

Fiber optic<br />

Input #7<br />

Fiber optic<br />

Input #8<br />

Fiber optic<br />

Input #9<br />

Phase L1 firing control via fiber optic wire.<br />

Phase L2 firing control via fiber optic wire.<br />

Phase L3 firing control via fiber optic wire.<br />

Feedback signal from phase L1.<br />

Feedback signal from phase L2.<br />

Feedback signal from phase L3.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


28 • Technical Data<br />

Indication Description Remarks<br />

Pin 1 – L1 Voltage<br />

Pin 2 – No Connection<br />

Pin 3 – CT – L1(grounded)<br />

Pin 4 – CT – L1<br />

Pin 5 – No Connection<br />

Pin 6 – L2 Voltage<br />

Pin 7 – No Connection<br />

Pin 8 – CT – L2 (grounded)<br />

Pin 9 – CT – L2<br />

Pin 10 – No Connection<br />

Pin 11 – L3 Voltage<br />

Pin 12 – No Connection<br />

Pin 13 – CT – L3 (grounded)<br />

Pin 14 – CT – L3<br />

Pin 15 – No Connection<br />

15 pins<br />

connector<br />

G Connection to ground For proper operation and for safety reasons the<br />

Control Module must be properly grounded.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


29 • Technical Data<br />

Figure 13 – Control Module Input/Output<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


30 • Technical Data<br />

4.7.1 Input Terminal 7 - Test/Reset/MULTI SOFT STOP<br />

Input from a N.O. contact – the functions described above are selected from the keypad (refer to section<br />

7.8.7 page 71) or software commands sent via the communication protocol (Modbus or Profibus).<br />

When RESET function is selected - connect terminal 7 using a N.O. momentary contact, to control input<br />

voltage to reset the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

When TEST function is selected - connect terminal 7 to control input voltage (use a N.O. contact) to conduct<br />

a firing test to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. For more details on the firing test refer to section 14.3 page 117.<br />

When MULTI SOFT STOP optional function is selected - connect terminal 7 to control input voltage (use a<br />

N.O. contact) to operate the soft starter in a Multi Soft Stop procedure.<br />

For wiring diagram refer to section 5.12 page 37.<br />

For programming refer to section 7.8.7 page 71.<br />

4.7.2 Input Terminal 8 - Dual Adjust/Reset<br />

Input from a N.O. contact - selection between above functions is made from the keypad (refer to section<br />

7.8.7 page 71) or through the communication (Modbus or Profibus).<br />

When DUAL ADJUSTMENT function is selected - connect terminal 8 to Control Input voltage to operate the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN with the DUAL ADJUSTMENT characteristic. DUAL ADJUSTMENT characteristic is programmed<br />

as explained in section 7.8.5 page 68. You can switch between the primary and DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

settings before and/or during starting.<br />

When RESET function is selected - connect terminal 8 to Control Input voltage (use a N.O. momentary<br />

contact) to reset the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

For wiring diagram refer to section 5.9 page 34.<br />

For programming refer to section 7.8.7 page 71.<br />

4.7.3 Output Terminals 10, 11 & 12 – Immediate/# Strts PreAlarm<br />

Programmable functions (refer to section 7.8.7 page 71):<br />

IMMEDIATE (after start signal) - when immediate is selected, the relay is energized upon the START signal.<br />

The relay is de-energized when one of the following occurs:<br />

• Fault<br />

• Control Supply outage<br />

• STOP signal<br />

When SOFT STOP is operated - the relay is de-energized at the end of the SOFT STOP process.<br />

The relay incorporates on and off delays of 0-3600 sec. each.<br />

The immediate relay can be used for the following purposes:<br />

• Interlock with other systems<br />

• Signalling<br />

• Delay the opening of a Line Contactor at the end of SOFT STOP, thus allowing current to decrease to zero<br />

before opening the contactor<br />

• Switch to / from Dual Adjustment settings with a time delay from the START signal (see Special Starting<br />

section 13.5.3.1 page 113).<br />

• # Strts PreAlarm detection - When configured to # STRTS PREALARM the relay is energized if a start<br />

command will cause the soft starter to trip on TOO MANY STARTS.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


31 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />

5. RECOMMENDED WIRING DIAGRAMS<br />

5.1 Control Supply and Control Inputs From a Single Source<br />

Notes:<br />

• Use this diagram when Control Supply, Control<br />

Input and Control Inputs for the External Faults<br />

are all from the same source.<br />

• If External Faults are not used leave terminals<br />

19, 20 and 21 not connected.<br />

• Supply must be protected from short circuit and<br />

over load. 10A fuse must be used.<br />

• It is recommended to use a separate fuse for<br />

the auxiliary circuits.<br />

5.2 Separate Sources for Control Supply and Control Inputs<br />

Notes:<br />

• Use this diagram when Control Supply and<br />

Control Input are all from the same source.<br />

• If External Faults are not used leave terminals<br />

19, 20 and 21 not connected.<br />

• Supply must be protected for short circuit and<br />

over load. 10A fuse must be used.<br />

• It is recommended to use a separate fuse for the<br />

auxiliary circuits.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


32 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />

5.3 Three Separate Sources for Control Supply and Control Inputs<br />

Notes:<br />

• Use this diagram when three separate<br />

sources for:<br />

o Control Supply<br />

o Control Input<br />

o Control Input for the External<br />

Faults<br />

• Supply must be protected for short circuit<br />

and over load. 10A fuse must be used.<br />

• It is recommended to use a separate fuse<br />

for the auxiliary circuits.<br />

5.4 Soft Start and Immediate Stop (No Soft Stop)<br />

Notes:<br />

• When switch A closes the motor will soft<br />

start.<br />

• When switch A opens the motor will stop<br />

immediately (no soft stop).<br />

• Drawing shows Control Supply and<br />

Control Input from the same source. Refer<br />

to section 5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply<br />

and Control Input from separate sources.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


5.5 Soft Start and Soft Stop wiring<br />

Notes:<br />

• When switch B closes the motor will soft<br />

start.<br />

• When switch B opens the motor will soft<br />

stop.<br />

• Drawing shows Control Supply and<br />

Control Input from the same source. Refer<br />

to section 5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply<br />

and Control Input from separate sources.<br />

33 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />

5.6 Soft Start, Soft Stop and Immediate Stop Wiring<br />

Notes:<br />

• When switch B closes the motor will soft<br />

start.<br />

• When switch B opens the motor will soft<br />

stop.<br />

• Switch A opens the motor will stop<br />

immediately.<br />

• Drawing shows Control Supply and<br />

Control Input from the same source. Refer<br />

to section 5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply<br />

and Control Input from separate sources.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


34 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />

5.7 Soft Start, Soft Stop and Stop<br />

Notes:<br />

• Switch A can be used as an immediate stop.<br />

• Switch B is used as a soft stop command to<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

• Switch C is used as a momentary or<br />

maintained start command to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

• Drawing shows Control Supply and Control<br />

Input from the same source. Refer to section<br />

5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply and Control<br />

Input from separate sources.<br />

5.8 External Fault<br />

Notes:<br />

• Switches E1 and E2 can be used as<br />

EXTERNAL FAULT input.<br />

• Drawing shows Control Supply and Control<br />

Input from the same source. Refer to section<br />

5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply and Control<br />

Input from separate sources.<br />

5.9 Dual Adjustment (Control Input #8)<br />

Notes:<br />

When two set of starting/stopping parameters are required (for example for loaded/unloaded motor<br />

or for multistart applications) do the following:<br />

• In I/O PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS mode page set PROG. INPUT #8 to DUAL<br />

ADJUSTMENT(default setting).<br />

• Set first set of parameters in the MAIN & PROTECT, START PARAMETERS and STOP<br />

PARAMETERS mode pages:<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


35 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />

MOTOR FLA, INITIAL VOLTAGE, CURRENT LIMIT, ACC. TIME and DEC. TIME.<br />

• Set second set of parameters in the DUAL ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS mode page:<br />

DA: MOTOR FLA, DA: INIT. VOLT., DA: CUR. LIMIT, DA: ACC. TIME and DA: DEC. TIME.<br />

• Start the motor with the primary set of parameters when switch D is open. Start the motor with the<br />

DA set of parameters when switch D is closed.<br />

• Note that it is possible to change the starting parameters also during soft start or soft stop. (refer<br />

to section 13.5.3 page 112.)<br />

• Note that if PROG. INPUT #8 is set to RESET than a momentary switch should be used for reset<br />

input to the soft starter.<br />

5.10 Bypass Contactor<br />

Notes:<br />

• End of Acceleration relay is energized after a programmed time delay RUN CONTACT DLY. Refer to<br />

section 7.8.3 page 60 for programming.<br />

• The End of Acceleration relay is de-energized when:<br />

o SOFT STOP or STOP signals are initiated<br />

o Fault condition occurs.<br />

• When a SOFT STOP signal is provided, the End of Acceleration relay returns to its original position<br />

thus opening the Bypass Contactor. Thereafter, the voltage will gradually ramp down to zero, soft<br />

stopping the motor.<br />

• Use an interposing relay (not shown) to control the Bypass Contactor.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


36 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />

5.11 Operating via Communication Links<br />

Notes:<br />

• In order to operate via communication, either Modbus or Profibus optional PCBs must be installed<br />

and wired properly.<br />

• In addition, optional Relay PCB must be installed in the control nodule. The optional Relay PCB will<br />

close a contact (terminals 31 & 32) when start signal is initiated via communication. This contact<br />

typically controls the Line Contactor via RS relay. When Line Contactor is closed mains power I<br />

connected to L1, L2 and L3.<br />

• Start command to the soft starter (terminal 6) is initiated by an auxiliary contact from the Line<br />

Contactor in series to an auxiliary start relay (RS) thus ensuring that the Line Contactor is closed.<br />

• <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be programmed to enable control (not only monitoring). Refer to section 7.8.8 and<br />

7.8.9 page 73 for programming.<br />

• Make sure that after programming, Control Supply voltage is disconnected and reconnected so that<br />

the communication settings will take affect.<br />

• <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will close the start/stop relay via communication commands UNLESS switches A or B are<br />

opened.<br />

WARNING! Beware!<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module and Power Section must be grounded at all times.<br />

When testing the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN control/communication it is possible to use the<br />

Control Module only without the Power Section.<br />

The Control Module MUST be properly grounded to avoid danger of<br />

electrical shock!!<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


5.12 Control Input #7<br />

Notes:<br />

• Switch D can be used as a Test<br />

input/RESET/MULTI SOFT STOP (optional) as<br />

programmed in I/O PROGRAMMING<br />

PARAMETERS. Refer to section 7.8.7 page 71.<br />

• MULTI SOFT STOP is applicable only when an<br />

optional software for MULTI SOFT STOP is<br />

installed.<br />

• RESET function requires a momentary contact<br />

to operate.<br />

• Test function is a unique feature of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN to test the operation of the firing system of<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. Refer to section 14.3 page 117.<br />

• Drawing shows Control Supply and Control<br />

Input from the same source. Refer to section<br />

5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply and Control Input<br />

from separate sources.<br />

37 • Recommended Wiring Diagrams<br />

5.13 Control Input #8<br />

Notes:<br />

• Switch D can be used as a DUAL<br />

ADJUST/RESET as programmed in I/O<br />

PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS. Refer to<br />

section 7.8.7 page 71. Refer also to section 5.9<br />

page 34.<br />

• RESET function requires a momentary contact<br />

to operate.<br />

• Drawing shows Control Supply and Control<br />

Input from the same source. Refer to section<br />

5.2 and 5.3 for Control Supply and Control Input<br />

from separate sources.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


38 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

6. INSTALLATION OF IP00 (OEM KIT) IN A CABINET<br />

6.1 Mounting<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN must be mounted vertically. Allow sufficient space for suitable airflow above and below the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Verify that minimum clearances specified in the below table, comply with the specified clearance ratings for<br />

the specified voltage. In addition, when glass epoxy of any-type or thickness is utilized within the cabinet<br />

assembly, minimum clearances must comply to below table:<br />

Maximum Voltage<br />

for Apparatus<br />

Minimum<br />

Clearance phase<br />

to earth<br />

Minimum<br />

Clearance phase<br />

to phase<br />

[kV] [mm] [mm]<br />

2.3<br />

3.3<br />

60 60<br />

4.16<br />

6<br />

6.6<br />

60 90<br />

10<br />

11<br />

13.2<br />

13.8<br />

15<br />

90 120<br />

120 160<br />

Notes:<br />

(1) Do not mount the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN near heat sources.<br />

(2) Cabinet internal temperature should not exceed 50°C. Refer to section 6.2 page 40 for heat dissipation of<br />

the soft starter during operation.<br />

(3) Protect the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from dust and corrosive atmospheres.<br />

(4) In order to perform low voltage test, certain provisions should be applied:<br />

a. When a step-down transformer provides the Control Voltage, allow for supply of Control<br />

Voltage from external source<br />

b. In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, allow sufficient access to the rear side of the EPT-Tx (to allow low<br />

voltage Test Harness connection).<br />

c. To allow phase disassembly, provide for the following assembly precautions (Refer to Figure 14)<br />

for:<br />

i. Horizontal support bar (this bar is mounted on the inner side of the M.V. door).<br />

ii. Two support rods 850mm length with M12 thread.<br />

For phase disassembly, the horizontal support bar is mounted at the front of the cabinet,<br />

bracing the support rods.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


39 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

Location of support bar when in<br />

use for phase disassembly<br />

EPT-Tx<br />

Location of support bar<br />

when not in use (option 1)<br />

Location of support bar<br />

when not in use (option 2)<br />

M12 thread<br />

Figure 14 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV - Phase Disassembly Accessories<br />

Set of support rods Ø12mm<br />

made of steel SAE1020<br />

6.1.1 Low Voltage Section<br />

(1) Control Module should be installed in a convenient place allowing access from every direction (this is<br />

achieved by mounting it on a hinged plate).<br />

(2) Due to fiber optic being a frail conductor, insert the fiber optic wires only at assembly completion.<br />

(3) Avoid fiber optic wires bending or stretching (minimal bending radius of 4 cm).<br />

(4) Avoid fiber optic wires installation near heat source.<br />

(5) Control Module and EPT-Rx cases are well grounded.<br />

Refer to standard cabinet wiring as detailed in section 10 page 83.<br />

6.2 Temperature Range & Heat Dissipation<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is rated to operate within a temperature range of -10°C (14°F) to + 50°C (122°F).<br />

Relative non-condensed humidity inside the enclosure must not exceed 95%.<br />

ATTENTION! Operating the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN with a surrounding air temperature that is higher than<br />

50ºC will cause derating.<br />

Operating the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN with a surrounding air temperature that is higher than<br />

60ºC may cause damage to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

During soft start the maximum heat dissipation in Watts is as follows:<br />

2,300V – 24xFLC [W]<br />

3,300V – 72xFLC [W]<br />

4,160V – 72xFLC [W]<br />

6,600V – 72xFLC [W]<br />

10,000V – 120xFLC [W]<br />

11,000V – 120xFLC [W] – for marine applications: 144xFLC [W]<br />

13,800V – 144xFLC [W] – for marine applications: 168xFLC [W]<br />

15,000V – 192xFLC [W]<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


40 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

6.3 Control Module Main PCB and Optional PCBs<br />

Figure 15 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module<br />

Remove top cover of the Control Module to access the main PCB, optional PCBs and dip switches.<br />

6.4 Dip Switch Settings on the Main PCB<br />

The dip switch has eight separate switches. It is located under the front cover of the Control Module.<br />

No. Switch Function Switch Off Switch On<br />

1 Display format Minimized Maximized<br />

2 Tacho feedback Disabled Enabled<br />

3 Must be off - -<br />

4 Must be off - -<br />

5 LCD language selection See tables below section 6.4.3 page 41.<br />

6<br />

7 Extended settings Disabled Enabled<br />

8 Software lock Open Locked<br />

6.4.1 Switch # 1 – Display Modes<br />

Two display modes are available:<br />

Maximized – display of all possible parameters.<br />

Minimized – display of pre-selected parameters.<br />

Setting switch # 1 to off will minimize the LCD displays.<br />

Refer also to section 7.7 page 51.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


41 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

Maximized Mode - Switch #1 – On<br />

Display only<br />

Main & Protect.<br />

Start parameters<br />

Stop parameters<br />

Dual adjustment<br />

Fault parameters<br />

I/O programming<br />

Communication parameters<br />

Statistical data<br />

Minimized Mode Switch #1 – Off<br />

Display only<br />

Main parameters<br />

Start parameters<br />

Stop parameters<br />

Statistical data<br />

6.4.2 Switch # 2 – Tacho Feedback (0-10VDC)<br />

Set switch #2 to on when using tacho feedback.<br />

Note:<br />

To operate tacho feedback consult with the factory for specific settings for each application.<br />

6.4.3 Switches # 5, 6 – Language Selection<br />

Language selection defined by the switch settings and software version shown on the internal label (shown on<br />

section 6.3 page 40).<br />

For software version: MVSTMB.GN-ddmmyy (where “ddmmyy” represents software version date in 6 digit<br />

format. i.e., 290108 refers to January 1 st , 2008)<br />

Language Switch #5 Switch #6 Position of Switches<br />

English Off Off<br />

French Off On<br />

German On Off<br />

Spanish On On<br />

For software version: MVSTMB.GN-ddmmyy-HB<br />

Language Switch #5 Switch #6 Position of Switches<br />

English Off Off<br />

Russian Off On<br />

Special Set On Off<br />

Chinese On On<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


42 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

6.4.4 Switch # 7 – Extended Settings<br />

EXTENDED SETTINGS corresponds to:<br />

Parameter Range Switch #7 - Off Range switch #7 - On<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE 10-50% 5 (1) -80%<br />

CURRENT LIMIT 100-400% 700%<br />

with the maximum limitation of:<br />

440x(FLC/FLA)<br />

PULSE TIME 100-400% 700%<br />

If PULSE TIME>1sec, with the<br />

maximum limitation of:<br />

440x(FLC/FLA)<br />

ACCELERATION TIME 1-30 seconds 1-90 seconds<br />

DECLERATION TIME 0-30 seconds 0-90 seconds<br />

MAX. START TIME 1-30 seconds 1-250 seconds<br />

Note:<br />

(1) Setting the INITIAL VOLTAGE to lower than 10% is not practical for loaded motors.<br />

WARNING!<br />

Operator’s<br />

responsibility!<br />

EXTENDED SETTINGS are for use in very special applications only!<br />

Do not set to switch #7 to on unless <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is significantly larger than the<br />

motor! When using extended settings for the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN you must be extremely<br />

careful to avoid damaging the motor or <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

6.4.5 Switch # 8 – Software Lock<br />

The software lock prevents undesired parameter modifications.<br />

When locked, pressing the Store, ▼or ▲ keys causes the LCD to display UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


43 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

6.5 Analog I/O (Option 5) (Terminals Gnd, Out (-), Out (+))<br />

Figure 16 – Optional Analog PCB<br />

Analog PCB is located on the upper right side of the control nodule.<br />

(Refer to Figure 15 page 10)<br />

Ground Terminal (terminal Gnd)<br />

Leave this terminal not connected. Ground the shield of the analog output signal at the recipient side.<br />

Analog Output (Terminals Out (+), Out (-))<br />

Dip switches allow selection between: 0-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA<br />

The analog value is related to I, 0….200% of FLA (not programmable).<br />

In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN 1000V models the analog value is related to I, 0….200% of FLC. In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN 1000V models<br />

inverse programming is optional as well (refer to section 7.8.7 on page 71).<br />

Switch No. 4-20 mA* 0-20 mA 0-10VDC<br />

S1- Switch # 1 On On Off<br />

S1 - Switch # 2 On On Off<br />

S1 - Switch # 3 Off Off On<br />

S1 - Switch # 4 Off Off On<br />

S2 - Switch # 1 On Off Off<br />

S2 - Switch # 2 Not used Not used Not used<br />

* Factory default setting<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


44 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

6.6 Insulation test (Option 4) (Terminals 25, 26, 27 and Leak)<br />

When this option is installed, resistor units RU-7 (Un≤7,200V) or RU13 (7,200>Un≤13,800V) must be installed<br />

as shown:<br />

Figure 17 – Optional Insulation PCB Wiring<br />

Figure 18 – RU-7, Resistor Unit – Dimensional Drawing<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


6.7 Remote Key-Pad Installation<br />

45 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

Figure 19 - Remote Key Pad, Connection Cable and Control Module.<br />

Note: Cable length is 1.5 meters (consult with the factory if a longer cable is required).<br />

Figure 20 - Remote Key Pad - Dimensions<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


46 • Installation of IP00 (OEM Kit) in a Cabinet<br />

Figure 21 - Remote Key Pad - Mechanical Installation and Cut-out Dimensions<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


47 • Control Keypad<br />

7. CONTROL KEYPAD<br />

The control keypad is the link between the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN and the user.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN control keypad features:<br />

(1) Two lines of 16 alphanumeric characters each with selectable languages – English, French,<br />

German, and Spanish. Russian and Chinese characters are optional and must be pre-ordered.<br />

(2) Six push-buttons (Mode, Reset, Select, Store, Up (▲) and down (▼) keys).<br />

(3) Eight indication LEDs (On, Start, Run, S.Stop, Stop, Test,, D.Adj., Fault)<br />

(1)<br />

(2)<br />

(3)<br />

7.1 LCD Arrangement<br />

CURRENT LIMIT<br />

390%<br />

Figure 22 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Keypad<br />

Upper line displays function.<br />

Lower line displays setting and\or measured values.<br />

7.2 Push-Buttons<br />

Scrolls through the display and programming menus of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Mode Note: Pressing Mode continuously increases the speed at which the parameters change.<br />

Select<br />

▲<br />

▼<br />

Store<br />

Reset<br />

When a mode name is displayed, pressing this button drills down to the parameters for that<br />

mode. When a parameter is displayed, pressing this button scrolls to the next parameter.<br />

Allows the operator to increment adjusted values shown in the display. Operator should press<br />

this button once to increment one value, or continuously to rapidly increment values up to the<br />

maximum value.<br />

Allows the operator to decrement adjusted values shown in the display. Operator should press<br />

this button once to decrement one value, or continuously to rapidly decrement values up to the<br />

minimum value.<br />

Stores modified parameters only when you have scrolled through all parameters and STORE<br />

ENABLE XXXXXX PARAMETERS is displayed. After you store a parameter successfully DATA<br />

SAVED OK message will display.<br />

Note: Pressing this button at any other time has no effect.<br />

Resets the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN after a fault has been dealt with and the start command has been removed<br />

(except for UNDERCURR. TRIP – Refer to section 7.8.6 page 69 parameter UNDER CUR.<br />

RESET). This cancels the fault displayed and allows you to restart the motor.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


48 • Control Keypad<br />

7.3 Status LEDs<br />

Green On Lights when the control supply voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Yellow Start Lights during soft start, indicating that motor supply voltage is ramping up.<br />

Green<br />

Yellow<br />

Run<br />

S.Stop<br />

Lights after completion of the starting process, indicating that motor is<br />

receiving full voltage.<br />

Lights during soft stop, indicating that the motor supply voltage is ramping<br />

down.<br />

Red Stop Lights when the motor is stopped.<br />

Yellow Test Lights when the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is in TEST mode.<br />

Green D.Adj. Lights when DUAL ADJUSTMENT is in operation.<br />

Lights upon operation of any of the built-in protections.<br />

Flashes when:<br />

• Date and time are not set<br />

Red Fault • INSULATION ALARM optional relay is activated. Refer to section 7.8.6<br />

page 69.<br />

• Fault was detected but TRIP AFTER BYPASS is set to DISABLE.<br />

Refer to section 7.8.6 page 69.<br />

7.4 Reviewing and Modifying Parameters<br />

Press the Mode key several times until you reach the required mode page.<br />

Press the Select key to review parameters for this mode.<br />

Once you reach the required parameter, use the ▼ or ▲ keys to modify its value.<br />

To store the new parameters, press the Select key until the STORE ENABLE message displays and then<br />

press the Store key. The DATA SAVED OK message will display for 2 seconds.<br />

7.5 Upon first Control Voltage Connection<br />

Few seconds after first connection of control voltage the Fault LED will flash and the LCD will display:<br />

ALARM:<br />

SET TIME & DATE<br />

It is advised to set the time and date as described on section 7.6.6 on page 50.<br />

If time and date are not set properly no time stamp to the faults shown in the STATISTICAL DATA.<br />

Note:<br />

If the Reset button is pressed this message will not appear any more!!<br />

7.6 Special Actions Performed in TEST/MAINTENANCE Mode<br />

7.6.1 Run Self Test<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />

The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />

***OPTIONS***<br />

Press the Select key.<br />

The LCD will display:<br />

RUN SELF TEST ?<br />

PUSH UP ARROW<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


Press the ▲ key.<br />

The Test LED will turn off and the LCD will display:<br />

SELF TEST PASSED<br />

49 • Control Keypad<br />

And after a few seconds the LCD will display:<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

7.6.2 View Software Version<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />

The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />

***OPTIONS***<br />

Press the Select key twice.<br />

The LCD will display:<br />

BTL-R-16/09/2008<br />

MVSTMB.GN-121008<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously to exit the TEST/MAINTENANCE mode.<br />

The Test LED will turn off and he LCD will display:<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

7.6.3 Obtain Default Parameters<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />

The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />

***OPTIONS***<br />

Press the Select key three times.<br />

The LCD will display:<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

DEFAULT PARAMET.<br />

Press the Store + Mode keys simultaneously.<br />

The Test LED will turn off and the LCD will display:<br />

DATA SAVED OK<br />

And after a few seconds the LCD will display:<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

CAUTION!<br />

Obtaining DEFAULT PARAMETERS erases all previously modified settings<br />

and requires the operator to reprogram all parameters that differ from the<br />

factory default.<br />

Note: It is especially important to reprogram the RATED LINE VOLTAGE and<br />

STARTER FLC (as shown on the label of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN) and all other<br />

parameters in MAIN & PROTECT mod page. Refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

7.6.4 Reset Statistical Data<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />

The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />

***OPTIONS***<br />

Press the Select key four times.<br />

The LCD will display:<br />

RESET STATISTICS<br />

Press the Reset + Store keys simultaneously.<br />

The Test LED will turn off and the LCD will display:<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


50 • Control Keypad<br />

DATA SAVED OK<br />

And after a few seconds the LCD will display:<br />

STATISTICAL DATA<br />

- **** -<br />

Press the Mode and go back to:<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

7.6.5 Calibrate Voltage and Current (Factory Use Only!)<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />

The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />

***OPTIONS***.<br />

Press the Select key five times.<br />

The LCD will display:<br />

VOLTAGE ADJUST.<br />

98 % OF Vn<br />

Press the Select key.<br />

The LCD will display:<br />

CURRENT ADJUST.<br />

23 % OF FLC<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously to exit the TEST/MAINTENANCE mode.<br />

The Test LED will turn off and he LCD will display:<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

7.6.6 Setting Time and Date<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously.<br />

The Test LED will light and the LCD will display:<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />

***OPTIONS***.<br />

Press the Select key seven times.<br />

The LCD will display:<br />

hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />

09:10 01/19/08<br />

Pay attention to the under line mark under the hour value.<br />

modify the hour value with or keys.<br />

Press Store key.<br />

The LCD will display:<br />

hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />

12:10 01/29/08<br />

Pay attention to the under line mark under the minutes value.<br />

Repeat the same procedure as for the hour settings to the minutes, day, month and year settings.<br />

After Store key is pressed last time the LCD will display:<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />

***OPTIONS***<br />

Press the Mode and ▼ keys simultaneously to exit the TEST/MAINTENANCE mode.<br />

The Test LED will turn off and he LCD will display:<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


7.7 Mode Pages<br />

Upon initiation of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, the LCD displays motor’s operating current:<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

You can review all mode pages by pressing the Mode key:<br />

MAIN & PROTECT.<br />

- **** -<br />

START PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

STOP PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

PARAMETERS<br />

FAULT PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

I/O PROGRAMMING<br />

PARAMETERS<br />

COMM. PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

STATISTICAL DATA<br />

- **** -<br />

These pages are skipped if <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is programmed to<br />

MINIMIZED MODE and are shown only in MAXIMIZED MODE.<br />

Refer to section 6.4.1 on page 40 for changing mode from<br />

MINIMIZED MODE to MAXIMIZED MODE.<br />

51 • Control Keypad<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


52 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8 Overview of All Mode Pages and Factory Defaults<br />

DISPLAY MODE PAGE<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

MAIN & PROTECT<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

RATED LINE VOLT.<br />

6600 VOLT<br />

START PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

SOFT START CURVE<br />

1 (STANDARD)<br />

STOP PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE<br />

1(STANDARD)<br />

Appears only in<br />

MAXIMIZED MODE (1)<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

PARAMETERS<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

DA: INIT. VOLT.<br />

30%<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 A<br />

STARTER FLC<br />

150 AMP.<br />

START TACHO. GAIN<br />

0(MIN. GAIN)<br />

STOP TACHO. GAIN<br />

0(MIN. GAIN)<br />

DA: INIT. CURRENT<br />

100%<br />

VOLTAGE FREQ.<br />

3,300V 49.9Hz<br />

MOTOR FLA<br />

150 AMP.<br />

PULSE LEVEL<br />

70% OF FLA<br />

DEC. TIME<br />

0 SEC.<br />

DA: CUR. LIMIT<br />

400% OF FLA<br />

POWER<br />

1,500 KW<br />

RATED MOTOR PWR<br />

1000 KW<br />

PULSE TIME<br />

0.0 SEC.<br />

FINAL TORQUE<br />

0 (MIN.)<br />

DA: ACC. TIME<br />

10 SEC.<br />

REACTIVE POWER<br />

500 KVAR<br />

SERVICE FACTOR<br />

100 %<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />

30 %<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

STOP PARAMETERS<br />

DA: DEC. TIME<br />

0 SEC.<br />

POWER FACTOR<br />

0.85<br />

UNDERCURR. TRIP<br />

0% OF FLA<br />

INITIAL CURRENT<br />

100 %<br />

DA: MOTOR FLA<br />

150 AMP.<br />

THERMAL CAPACITY<br />

0 %<br />

UNDERCURR. DELAY<br />

10 SEC.<br />

CURRENT LIMIT<br />

400% OF FLA<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

D. ADJ. PARAMETERS<br />

MOTOR INSULATION<br />

52.8Mohm<br />

O/C – SHEAR PIN<br />

850% OF FLA<br />

ACC. TIME<br />

10 SEC.<br />

OPTION CARD<br />

NOT INSTALLED<br />

O/C DELAY<br />

0.5 SEC.<br />

MAX. START TIME<br />

30 SEC.<br />

OVERLOAD CLASS<br />

IEC CLASS 10<br />

NUMBER OF STARTS<br />

1<br />

OVERLOAD PROTECT<br />

ENABLE WHILE RUN<br />

STARTS PERIOD<br />

20 MIN.<br />

UNBALANCE TRIP<br />

20% OF FLA<br />

START INHIBIT<br />

15 MIN.<br />

UNBALANCE DELAY<br />

5 SEC.<br />

RUN CONTACT DLY<br />

5 sec.<br />

GND FAULT TRIP<br />

20% OF FLA<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

START PARAMETERS<br />

GND FAULT DELAY<br />

5 SEC.<br />

UNDERVOLT. TRIP<br />

70% OF Vn<br />

UNDERVOLT. DELAY<br />

5 SEC.<br />

OVERVOLT. TRIP<br />

120% OF Vn<br />

OVEERVOLT. DELAY<br />

2 SEC.<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

MAIN & PROTECT.<br />

(1) - Refer to section 6.4.1 on page 40 for changing mode from MINIMIZED MODE to MAXIMIZED MODE.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


53 • Control Keypad<br />

Appears only in<br />

MAXIMIZED MODE (1)<br />

Appears only in<br />

MAXIMIZED MODE (1)<br />

Appears only in<br />

MAXIMIZED MODE (1)<br />

Appears when in<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE (2)<br />

FAULT PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

UV & PL AUTO RST<br />

NO<br />

I/O PROGRAMMING<br />

PARAMETERS<br />

Display and default values<br />

PROG. INPUT #7<br />

RESET<br />

COMM.PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

COMM. PROTOCOL<br />

MODBUS<br />

STATISTICAL DATA<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

T SINCE LST STRT<br />

NO DATA<br />

TEST/MAINTENANCE<br />

***OPTIONS***<br />

Display and default<br />

values<br />

RUN SELF TEST?<br />

PUSH UP ARROW<br />

UNDER CUR. RESET<br />

OFF<br />

PROG. INPUT #8<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

BAUD RATE<br />

9600 (MODBUS)<br />

LAST STRT PERIOD<br />

NO DATA<br />

PROGRAM VERSION<br />

MVSTMB.GN-110808<br />

BYPASS OPEN TRIP<br />

ENABLE<br />

FAULT RELAY TYPE<br />

FAULT<br />

PARITY CHECK<br />

EVEN<br />

LAST STRT MAX I<br />

NO DATA<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

DEFAULT PARAMET.<br />

TRIP AFTER BYPASS<br />

ENABLE<br />

IMM/ S.PIN RELAY<br />

IMMEDIATE<br />

SERIAL LINK NO.<br />

OFF<br />

TOTAL RUN TIME<br />

0 HOURS<br />

RESET STATISTICS<br />

BY-PASS AUTO RST<br />

NO<br />

RELAY ON DELAY<br />

0 SEC.<br />

S. LINK PAR. SAVE<br />

DISABLE<br />

TOTAL # OF START<br />

0<br />

VOLTAGE ADJUST.<br />

15 % OF Vn<br />

SET CURVE 0 FLT<br />

ENABLE<br />

RELAY OFF DELAY<br />

0 SEC.<br />

SER. LINK CONTROL<br />

DISABLE<br />

TOTAL ENERGY<br />

0 KWH<br />

CURRENT ADJUST<br />

99% OF FLC<br />

PWR ON & NO STRT<br />

ENABLE<br />

ANALOG OUTPUT<br />

NORMAL<br />

FRONT COM ADDRES<br />

OFF<br />

TOTAL R. ENERGY<br />

0 KVARH<br />

hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />

00:00 01/01/00<br />

INSULATION ALARM<br />

OFF<br />

INSULATION TRIP<br />

OFF<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

I/O PROG.PARAM.<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

COMM. PARAMETERS<br />

Applicable when<br />

Modbus optional<br />

PCB installed<br />

LAST TRIP<br />

NO DATA<br />

TRIP CURRENT<br />

0 % OF FLA<br />

PHASE SEQUENCE<br />

POSITIVE<br />

Applicable when<br />

profibus optional<br />

PCB installed<br />

TOTAL # OF TRIPS<br />

0<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

FAULT PARAMETERS<br />

COMM. PROTOCOL<br />

PROFIBUS<br />

BAUD RATE<br />

AUTO (PROFIBUS)<br />

PROFI.NETWORK ID<br />

OFF<br />

LAST 10 TRIPS<br />

hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

S. LINK PAR. SAVE<br />

DISABLE<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -10<br />

hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />

SER. LINK CONTROL<br />

DISABLE<br />

FRONT COM ADDRES<br />

OFF<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

COMM. PARAMETERS<br />

(1) - Refer to section 6.4.1 on page 40 for changing mode from MINIMIZED MODE to MAXIMIZED MODE.<br />

(2) - Refer to section 7.6 on page 48 for entering TEST/MAINTENANCE.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


54 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.1 Display Mode – Page 0<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

Display<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 %<br />

I1 I2 I3<br />

0 0 0 A<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

Description<br />

Displays operating current in each of the three phases as a percentage of motor<br />

FLA (Full Load Ampere).<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s Default Display. After pressing the Mode or Select keys, a time<br />

delay is initiated. Following the delay the LCD returns to this display.<br />

Displays the current of the motor in Ampere.<br />

VOLTAGE<br />

3300V<br />

POWER<br />

0 KW<br />

FREQ.<br />

49.9Hz<br />

Displays line voltage and frequency.<br />

Frequency is displayed after start command only.<br />

Displays motor power in kW.<br />

REACTIVE POWER<br />

0 KVAR<br />

POWER FACTOR<br />

0.83<br />

THERMAL CAPACITY<br />

0 %<br />

MOTOR INSULATION<br />

52.8Mohm<br />

OPTION CARD<br />

Not Installed<br />

Displays motor reactive power in kVAR.<br />

Displays motor power factor.<br />

Displays motor’s THERMAL CAPACITY in %.<br />

When THERMAL CAPACITY is 100% motor will trip on OVERLOAD.<br />

Displays the motor winding insulation level (displays only if the optional motor<br />

insulation PCB is installed).<br />

Displays only if there is no motor insulation or analog optional PCBs installed in<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Note:<br />

This ignores the optional communication PCBs. Even if a communication PCB is<br />

installed this message can display.<br />

Notes:<br />

In this page parameters cannot be programmed.<br />

Browsing the display in Display Mode is possible by pressing the Select key or the or keys.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


55 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.2 Main & Protect. – Page 1<br />

MAIN & PROTECT.<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

RATED LINE VOLT.<br />

6600 VOLT<br />

STARTER FLC<br />

150 AMP.<br />

MOTOR FLA<br />

150 AMP.<br />

Range<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

Description<br />

2300-15000 Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s rated voltage.<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s rate voltage should be as shown on its label. Refer<br />

to section Error! Reference source not found. on page Error!<br />

Bookmark not defined..<br />

Note:<br />

Setting RATED LINE VOLTAGE to other than the value on the<br />

label will cause a wrong operation and wrong readings of the<br />

soft starter.<br />

20 – 1800A Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s FLC (Full Load Current)<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s FLC should be as shown on its label. Refer to<br />

section Error! Reference source not found. on page Error!<br />

Bookmark not defined..<br />

Note:<br />

Setting FLC to other than the value on the label will cause a<br />

30-100% of<br />

STARTER<br />

FLC<br />

wrong operation and wrong readings of the soft starter.<br />

Sets motor’s FLA (Full load Ampere)<br />

Should be programmed as shown on the motor’s name plate.<br />

RATED MOTOR PWR<br />

1000 KW<br />

50-40000KW<br />

Sets motor rated power as indicated on its name plate.<br />

SERVICE FACTOR<br />

100%<br />

100-130% Sets motor rated service factor as indicated on its name plate.<br />

UNDERCURR. TRIP<br />

0% OF FLA<br />

UNDERCURR. DELAY<br />

10 SEC.<br />

O/C – SHEAR PIN<br />

850% OF FLA<br />

O/C DELAY<br />

0.5 SEC.<br />

0%(=OFF)/<br />

20-90% of FLA<br />

1-40SEC.<br />

100-850% of<br />

motor’s FLA<br />

setting<br />

0.0 – 5sec.<br />

Note:<br />

When set to<br />

0.0 it is<br />

practically up<br />

to 200msec.<br />

Sets UNDER CURRENT TRIP protection.<br />

Sets the time delay for UNDER CURRENT TRIP protection.<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when the motor current drops below the<br />

level that was set for a time period longer than UNDER<br />

CURRENT DELAY.<br />

Note:<br />

• Operational when the motor is running (the RUN LED is lit).<br />

• Can be set to AUTO RESET. Refer to section 7.8.6 page<br />

69.<br />

Sets OVER CURRENT SHEAR PIN protection.<br />

Sets O/C – SHEAR PIN DELAY time.<br />

Operational when <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is energized and has three trip<br />

functions:<br />

At all time - If I > 850% of FLC it trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN within 1<br />

cycle (overrides the value of the O/C – SHEAR PIN setting).<br />

At starting process - If I > 850% of FLA it trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

after O/C DELAY (see here after)<br />

At run time - If I > O/C – SHEAR PIN setting of FLA it trips the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN after O/C DELAY.<br />

Note:<br />

The OVER CURRENT SHEAR PIN protection is not intended<br />

to replace fast acting fuses to protect from short current!<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


56 • Control Keypad<br />

MAIN & PROTECT.<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

OVERLOAD CLASS<br />

IEC CLASS 10<br />

OVERLOAD PROTECT<br />

ENABLE WHILE RUN<br />

UNBALANCE TRIP<br />

20% OF FLA<br />

UNBALANCE DELAY<br />

5 SEC.<br />

GND FAULT TRIP<br />

20% OF FLA<br />

GND FAULT DELAY<br />

5 SEC.<br />

UNDERVOLT. TRIP<br />

70% OF Vn<br />

UNDERVOLT. DELAY<br />

5 SEC.<br />

OVERVOLT. TRIP<br />

120% OF Vn<br />

OVERVOLT. DELAY<br />

2 SEC.<br />

Range<br />

IEC CLASS 5/<br />

IEC CLASS 10/<br />

IEC CLASS 15/<br />

IEC CLASS 20/<br />

IEC CLASS 25/<br />

IEC CLASS 30/<br />

NEMA CLASS 5/<br />

NEMA CLASS 10/<br />

NEMA CLASS 15/<br />

NEMA CLASS 20/<br />

NEMA CLASS 25/<br />

NEMA CLASS 30/<br />

DISABLE/<br />

ENABLE<br />

WHILE RUN/<br />

ENABLE<br />

10-100%/ OFF<br />

1 –60sec.<br />

10-100%/OFF<br />

1 –60sec.<br />

50-90%<br />

1 –10sec.<br />

110-125%/<br />

OFF<br />

1 –10sec.<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

Description<br />

Sets OVERLOAD CLASS characteristics<br />

Sets OVERLOAD PROTECT functionality.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN allows motor protection according to IEC class<br />

5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30<br />

or according to NEMA class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30.<br />

Tripping curves are shown on section 7.8.2.1 page 58.<br />

The OVERLOAD protection incorporates a THERMAL<br />

CAPACITY register that calculates heating minus dissipation of<br />

the motor.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN trips when the register fills up. (THERMAL<br />

CAPACITY=100%)<br />

The time constant, in seconds, for cool down after overload trip<br />

is:<br />

Class 5 10 15 20 25 30<br />

IEC 160 320 480 640 510 960<br />

NEMA 140 280 420 560 700 840<br />

The overload protection can be set to protect the motor as set<br />

in the OVERLOAD PROTECT parameter:<br />

ENABLE – motor is protected at all time.<br />

ENABLE WHILE RUN – motor is protected only when in Run.<br />

DISABLE – motor is not overload protected by the soft starter.<br />

Note:<br />

In order to restart after OVERLOAD trip, the thermal register<br />

should be 50% or less.<br />

Sets UNBALANCE TRIP level.<br />

Sets UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY.<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when current unbalance increases above<br />

level that was set for a time longer than UNBALANCE DELAY.<br />

Notes:<br />

Becomes operational after the start signal.<br />

Sets GND FAULT TRIP level.<br />

Sets GND FAULT TRIP DELAY.<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when ground current increases above level<br />

that was set for a time longer than UNBALANCE DELAY.<br />

Note:<br />

Becomes operational after the start signal.<br />

Sets UNDER VOLTAGE TRIP level.<br />

Sets UNDERVOLT TRIP DELAY.<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when mains voltage drops below the level<br />

that was set for a time longer than UNDERVOLT DELAY.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Becomes operational only after the start signal.<br />

• When voltage drops to zero (voltage outage) the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

will trip immediately, thus overriding the delay.<br />

• Can be set to AUTO RESET. Refer to section 7.8.6 page<br />

69.<br />

Sets OVER VOLTAGE TRIP.<br />

Sets OVERVOLT TRIP DELAY.<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when mains voltage increases above the<br />

level that was set for a time longer than OVERVOLT DELAY.<br />

Can not be set lower than the UNDER VOLTAGE setting.<br />

Note:<br />

Becomes operational only after the start signal.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


MAIN & PROTECT.<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

MAIN & PROTECT.<br />

Range<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

Description<br />

57 • Control Keypad<br />

Storing modified parameters<br />

To store selected parameters scroll through all parameters until<br />

you reach STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT, then press the<br />

Store key.<br />

After you store a parameter successfully the DATA SAVED OK<br />

message will display.<br />

If <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN fails to store the parameter the LCD<br />

Will display the STORAGE ERROR message (refer to section<br />

8.2.4 on page 77 for more details).<br />

Note:<br />

Pressing the Store key when the STORE ENABLE XXXXX<br />

PARAMETERS message does not appear on the display has<br />

no effect.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


58 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.2.1 Tripping Curves of the Integrated Overload Protection<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN allows motor protection according to IEC class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 OR according to NEMA<br />

class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30.<br />

IEC Class OVERLOAD curves<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

IEC Class 5<br />

1000<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

1000<br />

IEC Class 10<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

100000<br />

IEC Class 15<br />

100000<br />

IEC Class 20<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

1000<br />

1000<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

100000<br />

IEC Class 25<br />

100000<br />

IEC Class 30<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

1000<br />

1000<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


59 • Control Keypad<br />

NEMA Class OVERLOAD curves<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

1000<br />

100<br />

10<br />

1<br />

0.1<br />

NEMA Clas s 5<br />

Cold<br />

Hot<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

NEMA Class 10<br />

1000<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

100000<br />

NEMA Class 15<br />

100000<br />

NEMA Class 20<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

1000<br />

1000<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

100000<br />

NEMA Class 25<br />

100000<br />

NEMA Class 30<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

Time [sec.]<br />

10000<br />

1000<br />

1000<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

100<br />

Cold<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

10<br />

Hot<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

1<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />

Current [I/FLA]<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


60 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.3 Start Parameters – Page 2<br />

START PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

SOFT START CURVE<br />

1 (STANDARD)<br />

START TACHO. GAIN<br />

0(MIN. GAIN)<br />

PULSE LEVEL<br />

70% OF FLA<br />

PULSE TIME<br />

0.0 SEC.<br />

Range<br />

0 (BASIC)/<br />

1 (STANDARD)/<br />

2 !!/<br />

3 !!/<br />

4 !!/<br />

5 (TORQUE)<br />

0 (MIN. GAIN)/<br />

1 !! /<br />

2 !!/<br />

3 !!/<br />

4 !!/<br />

5 !!/<br />

For PULSE<br />

TIME


61 • Control Keypad<br />

START PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />

30 %<br />

INITIAL CURRENT<br />

100 %<br />

Range<br />

10-50%<br />

After reaching<br />

50% the display<br />

changes to:<br />

INITIAL<br />

CURRENT<br />

100-400%.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the<br />

INITIAL<br />

VOLTAGE can<br />

be extended to<br />

5-80% by using<br />

the EXTENDED<br />

SETTING as<br />

described in<br />

section 6.4.4<br />

page 42.<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

Description<br />

Sets motor’s INITIAL STARTING VOLTAGE.<br />

The motor’s torque is directly proportional to the square of the<br />

voltage.<br />

This adjustment also determines the inrush current and<br />

mechanical shock. A setting that is too high may cause high<br />

initial mechanical shock and high inrush current. This can<br />

occur even if CURRENT LIMIT is set low because the INITIAL<br />

VOLTAGE setting overrides the CURRENT LIMIT setting.<br />

A setting that is too low may result in prolonged time until the<br />

motor starts to turn. In general, this setting should ensure that<br />

the motor starts turning immediately after start signal.<br />

CURRENT LIMIT<br />

400% OF FLA<br />

100-400%.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the<br />

CURRENT<br />

LIMIT can be<br />

extended to<br />

100-700% by<br />

using the<br />

EXTENDED<br />

SETTING as<br />

described in<br />

section 6.4.4<br />

page 42.<br />

Note:<br />

When INITIAL VOLTAGE is set its maximum value, this<br />

displays changes to INITIAL CURRENT.<br />

When INITIAL CURRENT is set the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN causes current<br />

ramp instead of voltage ramp.<br />

Sets motor’s CURRENT LIMIT during starting.<br />

A setting that is too high will increase the current drawn from<br />

mains and faster acceleration.<br />

A setting that is too low may prevent the motor from<br />

completing acceleration process and reaching full speed. In<br />

general, this setting should be set to a value that is high<br />

enough to prevent stalling.<br />

Note:<br />

CURRENT LIMIT does not operate during RUN and SOFT<br />

STOP.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


62 • Control Keypad<br />

START PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

ACC. TIME<br />

10 SEC.<br />

Range<br />

1-30sec.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the<br />

ACC. TIME can<br />

be extended to<br />

1-90 sec. by<br />

using the<br />

EXTENDED<br />

SETTING as<br />

described in<br />

section 6.4.4<br />

page 42.<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

Description<br />

Sets ACCELERATION TIME of the motor.<br />

Determines the motor’s voltage ramp-up time, from initial to<br />

full voltage.<br />

It is recommended to set ACCELERATION TIME to the<br />

minimum acceptable value (approx. 5 sec).<br />

MAX. START TIME<br />

30 SEC.<br />

NUMBER OF STARTS<br />

1<br />

STARTS PERIOD<br />

20 MIN.<br />

1-30sec.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the<br />

MAX. START<br />

TIME can be<br />

extended to<br />

1-250 sec. by<br />

using the<br />

EXTENDED<br />

SETTING as<br />

described in<br />

section 6.4.4<br />

page 42.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Since CURRENT LIMIT overrides ACC. TIME, when<br />

CURRENT LIMIT is set low, the starting time will be longer<br />

than the ACC. TIME setting.<br />

• When the motor reaches full speed before voltage reaches<br />

nominal, ACC. TIME setting is overridden, causing voltage<br />

to quickly ramp-up to nominal.<br />

• Using starting curves 2, 3, 4 prevents quick ramp up.<br />

Sets MAXIMUM START TIME.<br />

The maximum allowable start time, from the start signal to the<br />

end of the acceleration process. If voltage/speed does not<br />

reach nominal during MAX. START TIME then <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will<br />

trip the motor and create a fault. The LCD will display the<br />

LONG START TIME fault message.<br />

For example, this can occur when the CURRENT LIMIT<br />

setting is too low.<br />

1-10/ OFF Sets NUMBER OF STARTS permitted during STARTS<br />

PERIOD.<br />

Limits the number of starts during the period of time defined<br />

by STARTS PERIOD.<br />

If you try to start even one more time within that period the<br />

START INHIBIT period will take effect.<br />

1–60min.<br />

Sets STARTS PERIOD during which NUMBER OF STARTS<br />

is being counted.<br />

START INHIBIT<br />

15 MIN<br />

1–60min.<br />

Sets START INHIBIT time which starting is disabled after TOO<br />

MANY STARTS trip.<br />

During the START INHIBIT period the WAIT BEFORE RST<br />

XX MIN message will be displayed.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


63 • Control Keypad<br />

START PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

RUN CONTACT DLY<br />

5 SEC.<br />

TURN BYPAS ON AT<br />

120 % OF FLA<br />

MIN TIME TO BYPS<br />

3 SEC.<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

START PARAMETERS<br />

Range<br />

0-120sec.<br />

After reaching<br />

120 seconds,<br />

keep pressing for<br />

10 seconds the<br />

key and only<br />

if optional Relay<br />

PCB is installed<br />

the display<br />

changes to:<br />

TURN BYPASS<br />

ON AT<br />

120-300%.<br />

3-60sec.<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

Description<br />

Sets time delay for End of Acceleration relay to close after<br />

completion of starting process.<br />

End of Acceleration relay can signal that motor is at its RUN<br />

position which can be used for motor loading.<br />

For information on TURN BYPAS ON AT and MIN TIME TO<br />

BYPS refer to section 7.8.3.2 on page 65.<br />

Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


64 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.3.1 Soft Start Parameters<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates five starting curves to enable you to select a suitable torque curve.<br />

SOFT START CURVE 1 – Standard curve (Default). This curve is the most suitable curve for preventing<br />

prolonged starting and motor overheating.<br />

SOFT START CURVE 2-4 - Pump Control - Induction motors produce peak torque of up to 3 times the rated<br />

torque towards the end of starting process. In some pump applications, this peak may cause pressure surge in<br />

the pipes.<br />

SOFT START CURVE 2, 3, 4 – During acceleration, before reaching peak torque, the Pump Control Program<br />

automatically controls the voltage ramp-up, thus, reducing peak torque.<br />

Choice of four pump control acceleration curves: 1!, 2!, 3!, 4!<br />

SOFT START CURVE 5 (TORQUE) – Torque Controlled acceleration - This provides a smooth timecontrolled<br />

torque ramp for the motor and the pump.<br />

Note:<br />

Always start with SOFT START CURVE 1. If towards the end of acceleration peak torque is too high (pressure<br />

is too high) proceed to Curve 2, 3, 4 or 5 in that order.<br />

SOFT START CURVE 0 – Basic curve. This curve uses less feedback signals. Use this curve if other curves<br />

do not give good results.<br />

WARNING!<br />

When operating in SOFT START CURVE 0 motor must be loaded, otherwise,<br />

vibration may occur towards the end of the soft start process.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


65 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.3.2 Special Control for Synchronous Motors Excitation<br />

The parameters TURN BYPAS ON AT and MIN TIME TO BYPS are used for special cases of synchronous<br />

motors excitation system.<br />

These parameters are active only under the following conditions:<br />

• Optional Relay PCB is installed<br />

• When setting the RUN CONTACT DLY parameter, after reaching 120 seconds (maximum value) and<br />

operator keeps pressing for additional 10 seconds the key.<br />

The parameter TURN BYPAS ON AT determines motor current below which the soft starter goes into Run<br />

condition and closes the End Of Acceleration relay.<br />

The parameter MIN TIME TO BYPS assures that Run condition can not be reached before the set time after<br />

the beginning of the starting process.<br />

This special feature is for synchronous motor starting applications where the motor current at asynchronous<br />

speed may be at higher level than regular asynchronous motor starting conditions.<br />

In this case the level of current at which the Run condition is being achieved can be programmed.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


66 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.4 Stop Parameters – Page 3<br />

STOP PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE<br />

1 (STANDARD)<br />

STOP TACHO. GAIN<br />

0(MIN. GAIN)<br />

DEC. TIME<br />

0 SEC.<br />

Range<br />

0 (BASIC)/<br />

1 (STANDARD)/<br />

2 !!/<br />

3 !!/<br />

4 !!/<br />

5 (TORQUE)/<br />

0 (MIN. GAIN)/<br />

1 !!/<br />

2 !!/<br />

3 !!/<br />

4 !!/<br />

5 !!/<br />

0–30sec.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the<br />

DEC. TIME can<br />

be extended to<br />

0-90 sec. by<br />

using the<br />

EXTENDED<br />

SETTING as<br />

described in<br />

section 6.4.4<br />

page 42.<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />

Description<br />

Sets SOFT STOP CURVE.<br />

Refer to section 7.8.4.1 on page 66.<br />

1!! represents the 2nd level TACHO GAIN<br />

2!! represents the 3rd level TACHO GAIN…..<br />

5!! represents the 6th level TACHO GAIN.<br />

Notes:<br />

(1) This parameter will appear only if the optional PCB is<br />

installed and dip switch # 2 is set to on. Refer to section 6.4.2 on<br />

page 41 for dip switch setting details.<br />

(2) Tacho Feedback is operational in its basic form. Additional<br />

curves except for the basic linear curve are optional.<br />

(3) Consult the factory for the correct tacho selection and<br />

mechanical installation.<br />

Sets DECELERATION TIME of the motor.<br />

Used for controlled deceleration of high friction loads.<br />

Determines the motor’s voltage ramp down time.<br />

Note:<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN operates with a Bypass Contactor. The Bypass<br />

Contactor is controlled by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s End of Acceleration<br />

relay. Upon soft stop initiation the End of Acceleration relay is<br />

de-energized, the load is transferred to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, and<br />

voltage begins ramping down.<br />

FINAL TORQUE<br />

0 (MIN.)<br />

0 (MIN.) – 10<br />

(MAX.)<br />

Sets FINAL TORQUE during soft stop.<br />

Determines torque towards the end of a soft stop.<br />

If the current still flows after speed is softly reduced to zero, you<br />

should increase the FINAL TORQUE setting.<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

STOP PARAMETERS<br />

Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


7.8.4.1 Soft Stop Parameters<br />

67 • Control Keypad<br />

SOFT STOP initiation opens the End of Acceleration contact and opens the Bypass Contactor. Load will be<br />

transferred to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN thyristors and voltage begins to ramp down.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates 5 stopping curves that enable you to select the suitable torque curve:<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE 1 – Standard Curve (Default) – voltage is linearly reduced from nominal to zero.<br />

The most stable and suitable curve for preventing prolonged stopping and motor overheating.<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE 2, 3, 4 Pump Control – In some pump applications, when pumping to higher elevation a<br />

considerable part of the torque is constant and does not decrease with speed.<br />

It may happen that during the deceleration process when voltage decreases the motor torque abruptly falls<br />

below load torque (instead of smoothly decreasing speed to zero), thus closing the valve and causing water<br />

hammer.<br />

Curves 2, 3 and 4 eliminate the water hammer phenomenon. In pump applications the load torque decreases<br />

in square relation to the speed, thus correcting control of voltage to reduce torque adequately and to smooth<br />

deceleration to a stop.<br />

Note:<br />

It is recommended that SOFT STOP CURVE 1 be used for all standard applications (not pumps).<br />

To reduce water hammer, select SOFT STOP CURVE 2, then 3, then 4 in that order.<br />

SOST STOP CURVE 5 - Torque Curve - Provides linear deceleration of the torque. In certain loads, linear<br />

torque deceleration can result in close to linear speed deceleration, thus eliminating stall conditions.<br />

Note:<br />

Always use SOFT STOP CURVE 1. If the motor stalls quickly instead of slowly decreasing its speed, select<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE 2, 3, 4 or 5 in that order until the problem is solved.<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE 0 – Basic curve. This curve uses less feedback signals. Use this curve if other curves do<br />

not give good results.<br />

WARNING!<br />

When operating in SOFT STOP CURVE 0 motor must be loaded, otherwise,<br />

vibration may occur during the beginning of the soft stop process.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


68 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.5 Dual Adjustment Parameters – Page 4<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

PARAMETERS<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

DA: INIT. VOLT.<br />

30%<br />

DA: INIT. CURRENT<br />

100%<br />

DA: CUR. LIMIT<br />

400% OF FLA<br />

DA: ACC. TIME<br />

10 SEC.<br />

DA: DEC. TIME<br />

0 SEC.<br />

DA: MOTOR FLA<br />

150 AMP.<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

D. ADJ PARAMETERS<br />

Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />

(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />

Range<br />

Description<br />

10-50%<br />

After reaching 50% the<br />

display changes to:<br />

DA: INITIAL CURRENT<br />

100-400%.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the DA:<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE can be<br />

extended to<br />

10-80% by using the<br />

EXTENDED SETTING as<br />

described in section 6.4.4<br />

page 42.<br />

100-400%.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the DA:<br />

CURRENT LIMIT can be<br />

extended to<br />

100-500% by using the<br />

EXTENDED SETTING as<br />

described in section 6.4.4<br />

page 42.<br />

1-30sec.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the DA: ACC.<br />

TIME can be extended to<br />

1-90 sec. by using the<br />

EXTENDED SETTING as<br />

described in section 6.4.4<br />

page 42.<br />

0–30sec.<br />

Note:<br />

The range of the DA: DEC.<br />

TIME can be extended to<br />

0-90 sec. by using the<br />

EXTENDED SETTING as<br />

described in section 6.4.4<br />

Sets motor’s INITIAL STARTING VOLTAGE in DA<br />

mode. (Motor’s torque is directly proportional to the<br />

square of the voltage)<br />

Refer to section 7.8.3 on page 60 parameter:<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />

Sets motor’s highest current during starting in DA<br />

mode.<br />

Refer to section 7.8.3 on page 60 parameter:<br />

CURRENT LIMIT.<br />

Sets ACCELERATION TIME of the motor in DA<br />

mode.<br />

Refer to section 7.8.3 on page 60 parameter: ACC.<br />

TIME.<br />

Sets DECELERATION TIME of the motor in DA<br />

mode.<br />

Refer to section 7.8.4 on page 66 parameter: DEC.<br />

TIME.<br />

page 42.<br />

33-100% of STARTER FLC Sets motor’s FLA (Full load Ampere) in DA mode.<br />

Refer to section 7.8.2 on page 53 parameter:<br />

MOTOR FLA.<br />

Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page<br />

57.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


69 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.6 Fault Parameters – Page 6<br />

FAULT PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default Range<br />

Values<br />

UV & PL AUTO RST NO/YES<br />

NO<br />

UNDER CUR. RESET<br />

OFF<br />

BYPASS OPEN TRIP<br />

ENABLE<br />

TRIP AFTER BYPAS<br />

ENABLE<br />

10–120<br />

MIN./ OFF.<br />

ENABLE/<br />

DISABLE<br />

ENABLE/<br />

DISABLE<br />

Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />

(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />

Description<br />

Sets UNDERVOLTAGE and PHASE LOSS AUTO RESET.<br />

If UV & PL AUTO RST is set to NO then <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will not<br />

automatically reset after an UNDER VOLTAGE or PHASE LOSS<br />

faults occur.<br />

If you set the UV & PL AUTO RST setting to YES then <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

will automatically reset.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Reset is performed only after the start signal is removed. To<br />

restart the motor recommence the start command.<br />

• Refer to section 7.8.2 on page 55 for details on setting of<br />

UNDERVOLT. TRIP.<br />

Sets UNDER CURRENT RESET time delay.<br />

If the UNDER CUR. RESET setting is OFF then <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will not<br />

automatically reset after an UNDER CURRENT TRIP fault occurs.<br />

If you set the UNDER CUR. RESET setting to a time value then<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will automatically reset with a delay (the time defined for<br />

UNDER CUR. RESET).<br />

If the start command is not removed, motor will restart<br />

automatically after the delay time.<br />

During the delay time a message U/C TRIP.RST IN: XX MIN. is<br />

displayed.<br />

Notes:<br />

• If the start command is not removed, motor will restart<br />

automatically after the delay time!!<br />

• Refer to section 7.8.2 on page 55 for details on setting of<br />

UNDER CURRENT TRIP.<br />

Sets BYPASS OPEN TRIP protection.<br />

Becomes operational when the Bypass Contactor does not close<br />

after EOA contact command the pilot ( interposing) relay to close.<br />

Set to ENABLE when motor current is running through the internal<br />

CTs.<br />

Set to DISABLE when motor current is not running through the<br />

internal CTs.<br />

Sets TRIP AFTER BYPASS trip.<br />

TRIP AFTER BYPASS can be set to DISABLE if motor is protected<br />

by an additional relay usually upstream to the soft starter.<br />

If during operation a fault occurs, Fault LED will flash and soft<br />

starter will display the fault but will not trip the motor until the soft<br />

starter is stopped.<br />

BY-PASS AUTO RST<br />

NO<br />

YES/ NO<br />

Sets BY-PASS AUTO RST reset.<br />

When TRIP AFTER BYPASS is DISABLE and if during operation a<br />

fault occurs, Fault LED will flash and soft starter will display the<br />

fault but will not trip the motor until the soft starter is stopped. In this<br />

case the soft starter will go to Trip position.<br />

If BY-PASS AUTO RESET is set to YES, the soft starter will be<br />

automatically reset the fault.<br />

Note: Reset is performed only after the start signal is removed. To<br />

restart the motor recommence the start command.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


70 • Control Keypad<br />

FAULT PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

SET CURVE 0 FLT<br />

ENABLE<br />

PWR ON & NO STRT<br />

ENABLE<br />

INSULATION ALARM<br />

OFF<br />

INSULATION TRIP<br />

OFF<br />

PHASE SEQUENCE<br />

POSITIVE<br />

Range<br />

ENABLE/<br />

DISABLE<br />

ENABLE/<br />

DISABLE<br />

OFF/ 0.2–<br />

20Mohm<br />

OFF/ 0.2–<br />

20Mohm<br />

POSITIVE/<br />

NEGATIVE/<br />

IGNORE<br />

Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />

(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />

Description<br />

SET CURVE TO 0 message may occur seldom during starting with<br />

special conditions of mains and load. Change start (and stop, if<br />

used) curve to SOFT START CURVE 0 and SOFT STOP CURVE<br />

0.<br />

Set SET CURVE 0 FLT to DISABLE, only if SET CURVE TO 0 FLT<br />

fault occurs during starting and if SOFT START CURVE 0 is not<br />

good enough for the application.<br />

When set to DISABLE verify that motor starts normally in the<br />

selected curve.<br />

Sets POWER ON & NO STRT trip<br />

POWER ON & NO START is operational upon mains voltage<br />

connection. It trips the motor when mains voltage is connected to<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN for more than 30 seconds without a start signal.<br />

Set to DISABLE only in special occurrences. (Consult factory!)<br />

Sets INSULATION ALARM level.<br />

Activates INSULATION ALARM trip.<br />

Applicable only if optional insulation PCB and resistor unit are<br />

installed and connected.<br />

Insulation testing is enabled only when motor is not running and<br />

after 60 seconds in the Stop state.<br />

While motor is running the value of the insulation resistance shown<br />

in the display is the last measured value prior to starting of the<br />

motor. While testing, if the insulation level drops below Alarm level -<br />

a message: MOTOR INSULATION ALARM will display and the<br />

insulation alarm relay will be energized. The Fault LED on the<br />

control keypad of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will blink.<br />

If insulation level will return to normal for more than 60 seconds the<br />

alarm will automatically reset.<br />

While testing, if the insulation level drops below Fault level - a<br />

message: INSULATION TRIP will display and the fault relay of the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will go to the fault position (as programmed in the I/O<br />

PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS).<br />

The Fault LED on the front of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will light. In this status<br />

motor can not be started.<br />

If insulation level will return to normal the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will not<br />

automatically reset.<br />

Sets PHASE SEQUENCE protection of the soft starter.<br />

Allows to start the motor in POSITIVE sequence of the mains OR in<br />

the NEGATIVE sequence of the mains or, when set to IGNORE, in<br />

both sequences.<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

FAULT PARAMETERS<br />

Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


71 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.7 I/O Programming Parameters – Page 7<br />

I/O PROGRAMMING<br />

PARAMETERS<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

PROG. INPUT # 7<br />

RESET<br />

PROG. INPUT # 8<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />

(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />

Range<br />

Description<br />

RESET/<br />

TEST/ MULTI SOFT<br />

STOP (optional)<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT/<br />

RESET<br />

Sets terminal 7 function<br />

Refer to section 7.8.7.1 on page 72.<br />

Sets terminal 8 function<br />

Refer to section 7.8.7.1 on page 72.<br />

FAULT RELAY TYPE<br />

FAULT<br />

IMM/ # STRT PREAL<br />

IMMEDIATE<br />

RELAY ON DELAY<br />

0 SEC.<br />

FAULT/<br />

FAULT – FAIL SAFE<br />

IMMEDIATE/<br />

# STRTS PREALARM<br />

0 – 3600SEC.<br />

Sets FAULT RELAY mode of operation.<br />

When configured to FAULT the internal relay is<br />

energized upon fault.<br />

When configured to FAULT FAIL SAFE the relay is<br />

de-energized upon fault. In this mode, while normal<br />

operation, the contacts are open.<br />

Relay will also de-energize upon control power<br />

outage.<br />

Sets IMM/ # STRT PREAL mode of operation.<br />

When configured to IMMEDIATE the relay is energizes<br />

at the start signal after the programmed RELAY ON<br />

DELAY time has elapsed. It de-energizes at the end of<br />

the deceleration time (if any) after the programmed<br />

RELAY OFF DELAY time has elapsed.<br />

When configured to # STRTS PREALARM the relay is<br />

energized if a start command will cause the soft<br />

starter to trip on TOO MANY STARTS.<br />

Sets IMM/ # STRT PREAL on delay time.<br />

Sets IMM/ # STRT PREAL off delay time<br />

RELAY OFF DELAY<br />

0 SEC.<br />

0 – 3600SEC.<br />

ANALOG OUTPUT<br />

RELATIVE CURRENT<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

I/O PROG. PARAM.<br />

RELATIVE<br />

CURRENT/<br />

RELATIVE POWER<br />

When set to RELATIVE CURRENT the full scale of the<br />

optional analog PCB output is related to 200% of FLA<br />

(2x< Motor rated current>).<br />

Or, when set to RELATIVE POWER the full scale of<br />

the analog PCB output is related to 100% of motor<br />

power (1x< Motor rated power>).<br />

Motor rated power is set in the MAIN & PROTECT<br />

parameter. Refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page<br />

57.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


72 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.7.1 Terminal 7 and 8 Programming<br />

Input Terminal 7<br />

Programmed Function<br />

RESET (default setting)<br />

TEST<br />

MULTI SOFT STOP<br />

(Optional – only if optional<br />

software is installed)<br />

Input Terminal 8<br />

Programmed Function<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

(default setting)<br />

RESET<br />

Description<br />

Input terminal 7 is used as RESET to reset all <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN faults.<br />

The RESET command will take effect only if the start command is removed<br />

(except for UNDER CURRENT fault)<br />

While input terminal 7 is on firing test can be done.<br />

Refer to section 14.3 on page 117 for firing test procedure.<br />

While input terminal 7 is on, the soft starter will go to Run even if current is not<br />

running through the soft starter. This will enable Multi Soft Stop operation with the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Description<br />

Input terminal 8 is used to start and stop from the DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

PARAMETERS page. Refer to section 7.8.5 on page 68 for programming. Refer<br />

to section 5.9 on page 34 for wiring.<br />

Input terminal 8 is used as RESET to reset all <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN faults.<br />

The RESET command will take affect only if the start command is removed.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


73 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.8 Comm. Parameters – Page 8 – With the Modbus Card<br />

COMM.PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

COMM. PROTOCOL<br />

MODBUS<br />

Range<br />

MODBUS<br />

Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />

(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />

Description<br />

Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s communication PROTOCOL.<br />

Operational when the optional communication PCB is installed.<br />

BAUD RATE<br />

9600 (MODBUS)<br />

PARITY CHECK<br />

EVEN<br />

SERIAL LINK NO.<br />

OFF<br />

S. LINK PAR. SAVE<br />

DISABLE<br />

SER. LINK CONTROL<br />

DISABLE<br />

FRONT COM ADDRES<br />

OFF<br />

1200, 2400,<br />

4800, 9600<br />

EVEN, ODD,<br />

NO<br />

OFF,1 – 247<br />

ENABLE/<br />

DISABLE<br />

ENABLE/<br />

DISABLE<br />

OFF,1 – 247<br />

Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s BAUD RATE.<br />

Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s communication PARITY CHECK.<br />

Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s communication SERIAL LINK NO.<br />

Enables parameters modification via serial communication<br />

Enables start, stop, reset etc… via serial communication<br />

Future enhancement<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

COMM. PARAMETERS<br />

Notes:<br />

(1) Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />

(2) After changing communication parameters and storing them, control power<br />

must be switched off and on to load new communication parameters.<br />

7.8.9 Comm. Parameters – Page 8 – With the Profibus Card<br />

COMM.PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

Displays in MAXIMIZED MODE only<br />

(refer to section 6.4.1 page 40 for changing mode)<br />

Display and Default Range<br />

Description<br />

Values<br />

COMM. PROTOCOL<br />

PROFIBUS<br />

PROFIBUS/<br />

MODBUS<br />

Sets <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s communication protocol.<br />

Operational when the optional communication PCB is installed.<br />

BAUD RATE<br />

AUTO (PROFIBUS)<br />

User can not change BAUD RATE value.<br />

Max. rate is 12 mega bit per second (MBPS).<br />

PROFI.NETWORK ID<br />

OFF<br />

OFF, 1-126<br />

Sets the Profibus network ID.<br />

When set to OFF the Profibus PCB will not function.<br />

S. LINK PAR. SAVE<br />

DISABLE<br />

SER. LINK CONTROL<br />

DISABLE<br />

FRONT COM ADDRES<br />

OFF<br />

STORE ENABLE<br />

COMM. PARAMETERS<br />

ENABLE/<br />

DISABLE<br />

ENABLE/<br />

DISABLE<br />

OFF,1 – 247<br />

Enables parameter modification via serial communication<br />

Enables start, stop, reset etc… via serial communication<br />

Future enhancement<br />

Notes:<br />

(1) Same as STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT page 57.<br />

(2) After changing communication parameters and storing them, control power<br />

must be switched off and on to load new communication parameters.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


74 • Control Keypad<br />

7.8.10 Statistical Data – page 9<br />

STATISTICAL DATA<br />

- **** -<br />

Display and Default<br />

Values<br />

T SINCE LST STRT<br />

NO DATA<br />

LAST STRT PERIOD<br />

NO DATA<br />

LAST START MAX I<br />

NO DATA<br />

TOTAL RUN TIME<br />

0 HOURS<br />

TOTAL # OF START<br />

0<br />

TOTAL ENERGY<br />

0 KWH<br />

TOTAL R. ENERGY<br />

0 KVARH<br />

LAST TRIP<br />

NO DATA<br />

TRIP CURRENT<br />

0 % OF FLA<br />

TOTAL # OF TRIPS<br />

0<br />

LAST 10 TRIPS:<br />

hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />

Range<br />

Displays in MINIMIZED MODE and MAXIMIZED MODE<br />

Description<br />

Displays time since last start in minutes.<br />

Displays last starting time in seconds.<br />

Starting time is the duration until motor current drops to<br />

nominal.<br />

Displays last starting maximum starting current.<br />

Displays the motor’s total run time.<br />

Displays the total number of starts.<br />

Displays motor kWH consumption.<br />

Displays motor kVARH consumption.<br />

Displays the cause of the motor’s last trip.<br />

Displays motor current when the motor was tripped by the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Displays the total number of trips.<br />

Displays motor trip history.<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -1<br />

hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -2<br />

hh.mm mm.dd.yy<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

NO DATA<br />

NO DATA<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


8. MOTOR AND SOFT STARTER PROTECTION<br />

75 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />

Protection functions are distinguished between adjustable protection functions and non-adjustable protection<br />

functions.<br />

Upon fault – motor stops, Fault LED lights and Fault Relay chances position.<br />

The LCD shows TRIP: < fault description>. (for example: TRIP: UNDER CURRENT).<br />

WARNING!<br />

Upon any fault read carefully the COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION<br />

chapters in this <strong>manual</strong> before you try to identify the cause.<br />

8.1 Adjustable Protection Functions<br />

8.1.1 UNDER CURRENT<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when line current drops below the preset level for the preset time.<br />

Check UNDERCURR. TRIP and UNDERCURR. DELAY settings; check line currents through L1, L2, L3.<br />

For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

8.1.2 O/C –SHEAR PIN<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when:<br />

• Instantaneously when current exceeds 850% of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC<br />

• While starting when current exceeds 850% of Motor FLA<br />

• While running when current exceeds 100-850% of Motor FLA with a programmable delay of 0-5 seconds.<br />

Delay is overridden when current reaches 850% of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC.<br />

Check that the motor is not stalled or jammed.<br />

Check FLA, FLC settings.<br />

Check motor and cable connections.<br />

Perform a “Megger” test to check the condition of the motor and cables.<br />

For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

8.1.3 OVERLOAD<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when current exceeds the OVERLOAD TRIP level and the thermal register has filled up.<br />

Check FLA, FLC and overload settings and check motor current, then wait at least 15 minutes to let the motor<br />

and <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cool down before restarting.<br />

You may want to check motor THERMAL CAPACITY as displayed in the data page refer to section 7.8.1<br />

page 54.<br />

For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

8.1.4 UNBALANCE CURRENT<br />

Current Unbalance is the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the motor’s three line<br />

currents divided by the motor’s maximum current or motor FLA, whichever is greater. A fault occurs when the<br />

actual Unbalance is greater than the setpoint for a delay that exceeds the UNBALANCE DELAY.<br />

For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

8.1.5 GROUND FAULT<br />

Trips the motor when Ground Current exceeds the preset GND FAULT TRIP for more than<br />

GND FAULT DLY.<br />

Check motor and cable connections.<br />

Perform a “Megger” test to verify motor and cables condition.<br />

For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


76 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />

8.1.6 UNDER/NO VOLTAGE<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when line voltage drops below the preset level for the preset time.<br />

When voltage drops to zero, the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN trips immediately with no delay.<br />

Check UNDERVOLT. TRIP and UNDERVOLT. DELAY settings, check line voltages on L1, L2, L3.<br />

For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

8.1.7 OVER VOLTAGE<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when line voltage increases above the preset level for the preset time.<br />

Check OVERVOLT. TRIP and OVERVOLT. DELAY settings, check line voltages on L1, L2, L3.<br />

For protection parameter settings refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

8.1.8 LONG START TIME<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN if output voltage does not reach nominal at the preset MAX. START TIME.<br />

Check FLA, FLC and MAX. START TIME settings. Increase INITIAL VOLTAGE, CURRENT LIMIT & MAX.<br />

START TIME or decrease ACC. TIME as necessary.<br />

For parameter settings refer to section 7.8.3 page 60.<br />

8.1.9 OPEN BYPASS<br />

Operates when the Bypass Contactor does not close after the EOA contact of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN closes.<br />

Note: This protection can be disabled by setting BY PASS OPEN TRIP to DISABLE when the Bypass is<br />

connected in a separate cabinet, in a configuration where the starter CTs do not measure motor current while<br />

the Bypass Contactor is closed.<br />

For parameter settings refer to section 7.8.6 page 69.<br />

8.1.10 SET CURVE TO 0<br />

Trip occurs if the Soft Starter starts with a non-adequate starting curve to the network.<br />

Change start and stop parameter to SOFT START CURVE 0 and try again.<br />

For parameter settings refer to section 7.8.3 page 60.<br />

8.1.11 PWR ON & NO STRT<br />

Operates upon main voltage connection and activated while mains voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN for<br />

more than 30 seconds without a start signal.<br />

Note: This protection can be disabled by setting PWR ON & NO STRT to DISABLE. Do not set to DISABLE<br />

before you consult the factory!<br />

Reset the fault, and initiate the start command within less than 30 seconds after mains voltage is applied to<br />

L1, L2 and L3.<br />

8.1.12 MOTOR INSULATION<br />

(Optional) Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when the motor insulation level decreases below the trip level set.<br />

Check motor and cable insulation level.<br />

For INSULATION ALARM/TRIP protection settings refer to section 7.8.6 page 69.<br />

8.1.13 PHASE SEQUENCE<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN if line phase sequence is wrong.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN can be operated in any phase sequence as set in the PHASE SEQUENCE protection of the<br />

soft starter.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


77 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />

It allows the motor to start in the POSITIVE sequence of the mains OR in the NEGATIVE sequence of the<br />

mains or, when set to IGNORE both sequences.<br />

For PHASE SEQUANCE protection settings refer to section 7.8.6 page 69.<br />

8.1.14 TOO MANY STARTS<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN if NUMBER OF STARTS during START PERIOD exceeds the preset number.<br />

You must wait until the motor and the starter cool down according to the START INHIBIT setting.<br />

For protection settings refer to section 7.8.3 page 60.<br />

8.2 Non Adjustable Protection Functions<br />

8.2.1 UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY<br />

Trips the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN if frequency is not in the range of 44-65Hz<br />

Check that frequency variations are between 44-65Hz.<br />

8.2.2 PHASE LOSS<br />

Trips the starter if 1 or 2 phases are missing.<br />

Check lines voltages and correct connection.<br />

8.2.3 WRONG PARAMETERS<br />

After power up parameters not transferred from RAM to EEPROM or vice versa.<br />

Press Reset then load DEFAULT PARAMETERS. Refer to section 7.6.3 page 49 for more details on loading<br />

default parameters.Note that obtaining DEFAULT PARAMETERS erases all previously modified settings and<br />

requires the operator to reprogram all parameters that differ from the factory default.<br />

Note:<br />

It is especially important to reprogram the RATED LINE VOLTAGE and STARTER FLC (as shown on the<br />

label of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN) and all other parameters in the MAIN & PROTECT mod page. Refer to section 7.8.2<br />

page 55.<br />

8.2.4 STORAGE ERROR<br />

When trying to store parameters at the end of a mode page or after lading DEFAULT PRAMETERS.<br />

Press Reset and try again. If this does not succeed load DEFAULT PARAMETERS. Refer to section 7.6.3<br />

page 49 for more details on loading default parameters.<br />

Note that obtaining DEFAULT PARAMETERS erases all previously modified settings and requires the<br />

operator to reprogram all parameters that differ from the factory default.<br />

Note: It is especially important to reprogram the RATED LINE VOLTAGE and STARTER FLC (as shown on<br />

the label of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN) and all other parameters in MAIN & PROTECT mod page. Refer to section 7.8.2<br />

page 55.<br />

8.2.5 S. SCR OR WR. CON<br />

Operational after start signal. Trips if the motor is not properly connected to <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN’s load terminals, when:<br />

• Internal disconnection is detected in the motor winding<br />

• One or more of the SCRs have been shorted.<br />

• Incorrect fiber optic leads connection<br />

This protection is not active when SOFT START CURVE 0 is selected.<br />

Check with an ohmmeter between L1-U, L2-V, L3-W; resistances are listed on section 14.1 page 116.<br />

Check for no voltage on terminals U, V, W (from parallel system or an independent bypass).<br />

SCRs may fail due to:<br />

• High short current not protected by proper fuses.<br />

• High voltage spikes not protected by proper external Varistors.<br />

• Frequent starting at maximum conditions or fault conditions.<br />

For SOFT START CURVE 0 setting refer to section 7.8.2 page 55.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


78 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />

8.2.6 OVER TEMPERATURE<br />

Thermal sensors are mounted on the heat-sinks of the Power Section and trip the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN when the<br />

temperature rises above 85ºC.<br />

WARNING!<br />

The over temperature protection is designed to operate under normal<br />

conditions, e.g., in the event of extended low overload, insufficient ventilation<br />

due to fan stoppage or air flow blockage.<br />

Incorrect <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN selection, frequent starting at max. conditions, or repeated<br />

starting under fault conditions can cause the SCR to overheat and fail before<br />

the heat-sink reaches 85°C thereby causing the thermal sensors to trip the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

8.2.7 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 & EXTERNAL FAULT 2<br />

External Faults becomes operational when <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is energized.<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will trip if contact between terminals 19 and 21 closes for more than 2 sec.<br />

8.3 Fault and Reset<br />

When any of the above protections trip (except INSULATION ALARM), the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN locks in a fault condition<br />

thus disabling firing of the thyristors. Fault LED lights, fault description is displayed on the LCD and the fault<br />

relay operates.<br />

• For local reset, after fault has been removed, press Reset key.<br />

• Remote reset can be performed through terminals 7 or 8 (see I/O PROGRAMMING section 7.8.7<br />

page 71).<br />

When a fault occurs, followed by a voltage outage, the fault condition is latched and reappears upon voltage<br />

restoration.<br />

Note:<br />

Reset (Local, Remote, Serial Link or Auto Reset) is not possible as long as the START signal exists, except<br />

for UNDER CURRENT trip.<br />

8.4 Auto Reset<br />

UNDER VOLTAGE and PHASE LOSS faults can auto-reset (refer to section 7.8.6 on page 69). The <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN will reset itself 60 seconds after voltage was fully restored, provided that the START signal is removed.<br />

UNDER CURRENT fault can be set to auto-reset (refer to section 7.8.6 on page 69).<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will reset itself when a programmed time delay has elapsed even if the START signal is not<br />

removed!<br />

MOTOR INSULATION ALARM auto-resets if the resistance exceeds the INSULATION ALARM level (refer to<br />

section 7.8.6 on page 69).<br />

WARNING!<br />

Auto Reset explained here above corresponds to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 unit<br />

(OEM Kit).<br />

It is customer responsibility to avoid any dangerous conditions when the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN IP00 is installed in a medium voltage cabinet.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


79 • Motor and Soft Starter Protection<br />

8.5 Timing Occurrence Table<br />

Timing And Occurrence<br />

Too many starts with START INHIBIT period<br />

Active During<br />

Start Run Stop<br />

√<br />

Soft<br />

Stop<br />

Electronic overload with curve selection √ (1) √ (1)<br />

O/C shear pin (jam)<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN protection – trip immediately at I≥850% FLC in less<br />

than 1 cycle.<br />

Motor protection – trip function<br />

√ √ √<br />

During start – factory set at 850% FLA after O/C DELAY. √ √<br />

During run – adjustable 100 – 850% FLA after O/C DELAY.<br />

Under current adjustable time delay<br />

√<br />

√<br />

Unbalance current adjustable time delay √ √ √<br />

Ground fault current adjustable time delay<br />

√<br />

Phase loss √ √ √<br />

Phase sequence √ √ √<br />

Under voltage with adjustable time delay. Time delay is<br />

override in case of PHASE LOSS.<br />

√ √ √<br />

Over voltage with adjustable time delay √ √ √<br />

Long start time (stall protection)<br />

√<br />

Shorted SCR or Wrong Connection √ √<br />

External fault 1 & 2– input from a N.O. contact √ √ √ √<br />

SCR protection by Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) √ √ √ √<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Power Section over-temperature √ √<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN internal test, when the On LED is lit. √ √ √ √<br />

Motor insulation test (optional) – Two levels for alarm &<br />

trip. When installed, operates when mains voltage is<br />

√<br />

removed.<br />

Power ON and no Start<br />

√<br />

Bypass open trip<br />

√<br />

Set curve to 0<br />

√<br />

Notes:<br />

(1) Electronic OVERLOAD can be set to operate at all times, during Run or it can be disabled.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


80 • Packing, Storage, Handling and Assembly<br />

9. PACKING, STORAGE, HANDLING AND ASSEMBLY<br />

Note!<br />

This section only refers to standard cabinet!<br />

For other than standard cabinet design refer to the supplied drawings and/or<br />

consult the factory.<br />

9.1 Packing Specification<br />

Equipment is packed and covered and placed on the case base of the crate.<br />

Crate side walls 8mm thick playwood and 20x90mm beams<br />

Crate is closed by pins and metal band<br />

Crate is marked by international marks<br />

Wood is marked in according to ISPM 15<br />

9.2 Storage<br />

The soft starter is designed for indoor use and must not be left outdoors.<br />

Soft starter should be stored in a warm, dry room and protected against dust and debris.<br />

If the soft starter is to be kept in store before use make sure that the ambient conditions are acceptable:<br />

Storing temperature: -20…..+70°C<br />

Relative humidity:<br />


81 • Packing, Storage, Handling and Assembly<br />

Figure 24 – Cabinet Lifting Using 4 Lifting Cables. Top angle, A, Should be ≤60°<br />

9.4 Soft starter’s Assembly Procedure:<br />

Assembly procedure comprised of:<br />

Mechanical assembly & Power and Control cables connection<br />

When assembling the cabinet the following torque table should be applied for the mechanical and electrical<br />

bolts closing:<br />

Bolt size<br />

M4<br />

M5<br />

M6<br />

M8<br />

M10<br />

M12<br />

M16<br />

Torque<br />

1.5Nm<br />

2.5Nm<br />

4.5Nm<br />

1`0Nm<br />

20Nm<br />

40Nm<br />

80Nm<br />

9.4.1 Mechanical Assembly<br />

Four 22mm diameter holes located at the bottom frame of the cabinet as indicated in the Figure 25.<br />

Mount the cabinet in place and anchor it with 4 bolts.<br />

Figure 25 – Anchor Bolts Holes Location on the Base of the Cabinet at Level 0mm.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


82 • Packing, Storage, Handling and Assembly<br />

9.4.2 Power and Control Cable Connections<br />

9.4.3 Power Cables Connection<br />

Figure 26 – Power and Control Cables Penetration to the Cabinet at Level 75mm<br />

Figure 27 – Power Cables Connection and Control Cables Routing.<br />

Note!<br />

For low voltage test it is advised to leave motor terminals open to enable easy<br />

connection of the low voltage motor.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


83 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

10. COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION MANUAL<br />

WARNING!<br />

Safety<br />

Precautions!<br />

The information in this <strong>manual</strong> does not purport to cover all details or variations in<br />

equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection<br />

with installation, operation or maintenance.<br />

Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which<br />

are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, please contact your local<br />

Solcon office.<br />

Further, the contents of this Manual shall neither become a part of nor modify any<br />

prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract<br />

contains the entire obligation of Solcon. The warranty contained in the contract<br />

between the parties is the sole warranty of Solcon. Any statements contained<br />

herein do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty.<br />

• Read this <strong>manual</strong> carefully before operating the equipment and follow its<br />

instructions.<br />

• Installation, operation and maintenance should be in strict accordance with<br />

this <strong>manual</strong>, national codes and good practice. Installation or operation not<br />

performed in strict accordance with these instructions will avoid<br />

manufacturer’s warranty.<br />

• Never open the medium voltage doors of the cabinet while medium<br />

voltage is connected to the cabinet.<br />

• Do not open the medium voltage doors, even if the motor is not running<br />

and the Line Contactor is open. Medium voltage may still be connected to<br />

the cabinet (upstream the contactor)!<br />

• Ensure, before opening the medium voltage doors, that the input medium<br />

voltage lines are disconnected from mains and grounded.<br />

• It is absolutely forbidden to change the position of the internal selector<br />

switches while Line Contactor is closed.<br />

• Before closing the doors for medium voltage operation, ensure that the low<br />

voltage Test Harness is not connected. The Test Harness is only used for<br />

the low voltage test. As a rule, always disconnect the harness immediately<br />

after ending the low voltage test. It should be mounted inside small plastic<br />

bag in the drawing pocket. This Test Harness is equipped with long tape,<br />

intended to prevent forgetting it connected. Never cut this warning tape.<br />

Leave open for its full length and laid in such a way that the harness will<br />

not be forgotten connected after the low voltage test.<br />

• The Line Contactor is not designed for disconnecting high short circuit<br />

currents. Therefore the trip relay terminals 39-40-41 must be used to open<br />

the upstream breaker. Alternatively, upstream fuses can be used.<br />

• The software of the external PLC (if used) controlling the starter must<br />

check the status of the trip relay in customer terminals 39-40-41. Upon<br />

detecting a trip signal, the PLC should open the Remote Start / Stop<br />

contact (connected to customer terminals 15-16) immediately.<br />

10.1 Operational notes<br />

• The seven Logic Inputs of the Control Module (terminals 4-5-6-7-8-9 & 19-20-21) are high impedance<br />

inputs. Add an auxiliary relay for each Logic Input connected through long wire to a remote location<br />

outside the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet.<br />

• Do not connect power factor correction capacitors in parallel with the motor at the output side of the soft<br />

starter. It may cause an immediate damage to the starter and/or capacitors and can be dangerous.<br />

• Do not use power factor capacitors at all if the starter is powered from a generator. The capacitors may<br />

interfere with the voltage regulator of the generator. They may cause significant dangerous over voltages.<br />

• If there are power factor capacitors connected upstream of the starter, and they are mounted close to the<br />

starter, it is recommended to disconnect the capacitors until the end of commissioning.<br />

• Perform a Megger test to the motor and its cables while disconnected from the cabinet. After the end of<br />

test, leave the cable unconnected to enable the low voltage test.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


84 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

Warning!<br />

• Internal components and PCBs are connected to high potential when the starter’s cabinet is connected<br />

to mains voltage.<br />

• Never connect medium voltage to the cabinet, while any of the medium voltage doors is open.<br />

• This high voltage is extremely dangerous and causes death or severe injury if contacted.<br />

• Unit must be grounded to ensure correct operation, safety and to prevent damage.<br />

• This medium voltage unit must be tested and operated only by authorized and licensed personnel.<br />

10.2 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />

This section describe the standard cabinet comprising of: input bus bars, Line Contactor, Power Section,<br />

Bypass Contactor, low voltage compartment and output bus bars.<br />

10.2.1 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV)<br />

Figure 28 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet – One Line Diagram<br />

The standard cabinet includes one frame with three doors. One of the doors is a medium voltage door and two<br />

doors are for low voltage: low voltage compartment door and the customer terminals compartment door.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


85 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

Warning!<br />

You are only allowed to open the low voltage compartment door and customer terminal compartment door<br />

when medium voltage is connected to the cabinet!<br />

It is strictly forbidden to open the medium voltage compartment door at any time when medium voltage is<br />

connected to the cabinet!<br />

Figure 29 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard<br />

Cabinet – Doors Closed<br />

Figure 30 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV Standard Cabinet –<br />

Doors Open<br />

View with medium voltage door open and customer terminals compartment door:<br />

• Customer terminals are located in a dedicated compartment on the top of the cabinet.<br />

• Line Contactor is mounted on the top of the medium voltage compartment.<br />

• The EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential Transformer Transmitter) is mounted on the medium voltage bus<br />

bars downstream the Line Contactor on the input to the Power Section of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN thus<br />

measuring the input voltage to the Power Section.<br />

The output of the EPT-Tx are two fiber optic wires running to the EPT-Rx (Electronic Potential<br />

Transformer Receiver) which is located in the low voltage compartment.<br />

The harness runs out of the Power Section to the low voltage compartment. This harness includes<br />

both fiber optic wires and copper wires.<br />

• The main unit is the Power Section of the soft starter.<br />

Note that this Power Section is actually composed of three identical modules, one per phase.<br />

The input bus bars to the Power Section are on top of it marked L1,L2, L3.<br />

Two sets of three bus bars each are mounted at the bottom of the Power Section:<br />

o One set, marked L1B,L2B,L3B, is connected to the input bus bars of the Power Section. These<br />

bus bars are brought to the bottom of the Power Section to enable convenient connection of the<br />

Bypass Contactor.<br />

o Second set, marked U,V,W, is the output bas bars.<br />

• At the bottom of the cabinet the Bypass Contactor is located.<br />

• Verify on cabinet label that both, medium voltage and control voltage, are according to the supplied<br />

mains voltage and control voltage.<br />

• Input bus bars and output bus bars are located at the bottom of the cabinet.<br />

The input bus bars are at the back of the lower part of the cabinet.<br />

The output bus bars are at the front of the lower part of the cabinet.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


86 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

10.2.2 Parts Identification in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up)<br />

Figure 31 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, Standard Cabinet – One Line Diagram<br />

The standard cabinet includes three frames with nine doors. Four of the doors are medium voltage doors and<br />

five doors are for low voltage: low voltage compartment door and customer terminals compartment doors.<br />

Note:<br />

You are only allowed to open the low voltage compartment door and customer terminal compartments doors<br />

when medium voltage is connected to the cabinet!<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


87 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

It is strictly forbidden to open the medium voltage compartment door at any time when medium voltage is<br />

connected to the cabinet!<br />

Figure 32 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up Standard Cabinet – Doors Closed<br />

Figure 33 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up Standard Cabinet – Doors Open<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


88 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

View with medium voltage doors open and customer terminals compartment doors open:<br />

• Customer terminals are located in a dedicated compartments on the top of the cabinet.<br />

• Line Contactor is mounted on the left medium voltage compartment.<br />

• The EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential Transformer Transmitter) is mounted on the medium voltage bus<br />

bars downstream the Line Contactor on the input to the Power Section of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN thus<br />

measuring the input voltage to the Power Section.<br />

The output of the EPT-Tx are two fiber optic wires running to the EPT-Rx (Electronic Potential<br />

Transformer Receiver) which is located in the low voltage compartment.<br />

The harness runs out of the Power Section to the low voltage compartment. This harness includes<br />

both fiber optic wires and copper wires.<br />

• The main unit is the Power Section of the soft starter.<br />

Note that this Power Section is actually composed of three identical modules, one per phase.<br />

The input bus bars to the Power Section are on top of it marked L1,L2, L3.<br />

The output bus bars from the Power Section are on its bottom and are marked U, V, W.<br />

• Bypass Contactor is mounted on the right medium voltage compartment.<br />

• Verify on cabinet label that both, medium voltage and control voltage, are according to the supplied<br />

mains voltage and control voltage.<br />

• Input bus bars and output bus bars are located at the bottom of the cabinet.<br />

The input bus bars are at the input cabinet.<br />

The output bus bars are at the output cabinet.<br />

10.2.3 Low Voltage Compartment<br />

Figure 34 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Low Voltage Compartment<br />

• The Control Module is the heart of the soft starter which controls the firing angle of the thyristors<br />

(located in the Power Section).<br />

Warning: The six fiber optic wires on top of the control unit are sensitive to bending and heat.<br />

• The EPT-Rx (Electronic Potential Transformer Receiver) is located behind the Control Module.<br />

Note the two fiber optic wires connecting the EPT-Rx to the EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential Transformer<br />

Transmitter) (located in the Power Section). The EPT-Rx is equipped with a fused supply voltage<br />

connector.<br />

The EPT-Rx provides three phase replica of the mains voltages in level of 120VAC (line to line).<br />

These voltages are connected to the Control Module, and also (optional) to the motor protection relay<br />

(MPR) located on the door of the low voltage compartment.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


89 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

• Interposing relays connect the commands and indications to/from the Control Module.<br />

• The selector switches (DOL/Soft start and Local/remote/Comm./Off) are mounted inside the low<br />

voltage compartment to prevent accidental change in their position while the Line Contactor is closed.<br />

Note: it is forbidden to change the position of these selector switches while Line Contactor is closed.<br />

• The Firing Transformer located on the right side of the low voltage section.<br />

• The control terminals in the low voltage compartment are NOT for customer use.<br />

10.2.4 Fuses<br />

The soft starter includes four fuses:<br />

• Three fuses are located in the medium voltage Power Section, one per phase. They are located at the<br />

smaller PCBs PC2075 (for 110VAC, 230VAC, 220VDC control voltage) or PC2076 (for 110VDC,<br />

125VDC control voltage). These fuses are connected at the input side of the firing switched mode<br />

power supplies and rated 10A.<br />

To check these fuses:<br />

o In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN rated up to 6.6kV it is required to disassemble the phases cover (open the plastic<br />

o<br />

screws as shown on Figure 35).<br />

In <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN rated from 10kV and up the power supplies are located at the top compartment in<br />

the medium voltage compartment as shown on Figure 36).<br />

Note:<br />

For 110VAC, 230VAC, 220VDC control voltage a blown fuse will prevent firing supply for Its own<br />

phase only.<br />

For 110VDC, 125VDC control voltage, any blown fuse will prevent firing supply of all three phases.<br />

Front View of the Power Section<br />

Power Supply to Firing PCB<br />

Figure 35 – Power Supply to Firing PCB (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Models up to 6600V).<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


90 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

Front View of the Power Section<br />

Power Supply to Firing PCB<br />

Figure 36 – Power Supply to Firing PCB (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Models From 10000V and up)<br />

• One fuse is located in the Low voltage compartment, inside the input connector of the Electronic<br />

Potential Transformer Receiver (EPT-Rx). The EPT-Rx is located behind the Control Module.<br />

Bottom view of the EPT-Rx Use 5mm screw driver to remove<br />

the fuse holder from the socket<br />

Fuse holder with fuse in use<br />

and a spare fuse<br />

Figure 37 – EPT-Rx Fuse Replacement Procedure<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


91 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

10.3 Standard Control Diagram<br />

Note!! • The following diagram shows a standard wiring for a 115VAC and 230V control voltage.<br />

• This drawing is given for demonstrating purposes only.<br />

• Note that the cabinet you have might be wired differently!!<br />

Figure 38 - <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN - Typical Control Wiring of Standard Cabinet<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


92 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

• Control voltage is supplied via customer terminals number 1 & 2.<br />

• L.S. 1 is a limit switch that control the internal lighting fixture and signal to external control system (via<br />

terminal 42 & 44) that medium voltage door is opened. Customer can trip the incoming circuit breaker<br />

to disconnect medium voltage from the input bus bars of the cabinet for safety.<br />

• H is a heater to avoid humidity in the cabinet.<br />

• ES1 is a N.C. emergency stop push button mounted on the front of the low voltage compartment door.<br />

• Terminals 5 & 6 are for remote emergency stop N.C. push button. Customer can connect several N.C.<br />

push buttons located in several locations in the plant. For example: near the motor and at the control<br />

room.<br />

• L1-Line Contactor off (Red) – indicates that Line Contactor is open. Mounted on the front of the low<br />

voltage compartment door.<br />

• L2-Line Contactor on (Green) – indicates that Line Contactor is closed. Mounted on the front of the<br />

low voltage compartment door.<br />

• L3-Bypass Contactor on (Green) – indicates that Bypass Contactor is closed. Mounted on the front<br />

of the low voltage compartment door.<br />

• L4-Fault (Red) – indicates that the soft starter tripped either because of a fault indicated by the Control<br />

Module or from an internal motor protection or an external motor protection indication via customer<br />

terminals 17 & 18. Mounted on the front of the low voltage compartment door.<br />

• C1 is the Line Contactor. Mounted in the medium voltage compartment.<br />

• RC1 is an interposing relay to enable more contacts representing the position of the Line Contactor.<br />

• FT & FT/1 are the fault relays. The relays are energized in normal operation and de-energized upon<br />

fault indicated by the Control Module or from an external motor protection indication via customer<br />

terminals 17 & 18.<br />

• C2 is the Bypass Contactor. Mounted in the medium voltage compartment.<br />

• S1 is a selector switch for DOL/Soft Start by the user.<br />

When set to DOL:<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Energizes the Bypass Contactor C2<br />

Disconnects control voltage from the Control Module thus avoiding soft start and avoiding the<br />

Control Module to trip the motor in case of a fault.<br />

Note that external motor protection relays (if exist) will stay in operation and protect the motor.<br />

When set to Soft Start:<br />

o Bypass Contactor C2 is energized via the control circuitry.<br />

o The Control Module is powered from the Control voltage and the Control module is controlling<br />

the starting process and protecting the motor.<br />

• FR – is the firing relay controlled by the Control Module to energize the firing transformer (TR1 in the<br />

diagram).<br />

The firing transformer energizes the power supply PCBs which feed the firing PCBs in the Power<br />

Section. This is required only during soft start and soft stop periods<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

The firing transformer applicable in 115VAC, 230VAC control voltage. See different wiring of<br />

TR1 transformer for 115VAC and 230VAC<br />

In 220VDC control voltage a power supply (not shown in the diagram) is controlled by the FR<br />

relay<br />

In 110VDC and 125VDC the FR relay energize a power contactor that feeds the power supply<br />

PCBs (not shown in the diagram)<br />

• Soft Starter – is the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module.<br />

• K1 – Is an interposing relay controlled by the internal IMMEDIATE relay of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Controlled by terminal 10 of the Control Module. The relay Energized when starter is in any condition<br />

except for stop and de-energized at stop. Its Normally Open contact is used in series with RC1 contact<br />

to hold the Line Contactor C1 energized at the soft stop process.<br />

• K3 – Is an interposing relay controlled by the internal FAULT relay of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Controlled by terminal 13 of the Control Module. Energized only when starter trips for fault. The<br />

normally closed contact is connected in series with the N.C. trip contact of the optional motor<br />

protection relay (MPR).<br />

• K2 – Is an interposing relay controlled by the internal END OF ACCELERATION relay of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN. Controlled by terminal 16 of the Control Module. K2 is energized after the end of the starting<br />

process to close the Bypass Contactor C2. K2 is de-energized upon Stop or Soft Stop commands or<br />

upon Fault.<br />

• EPT-Rx – Is the Electronic Potential Transformer – Receiver.<br />

• S2 - is a selector switch for Local/Remote/Comm./Off controlled by the user.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


93 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

o When set to Off disconnects control voltage to RS thus avoids the possibility to start the motor<br />

either locally or from remote<br />

o When set to Local enables control from ST & SP (start & stop) push buttons mounted on the<br />

front of the low voltage compartment door<br />

o When set to Remote enables control via terminals 15 & 16 by a maintained contact controlled<br />

by the customer<br />

o When set to Communication enables control via terminals 31 & 32 of the Control Module.<br />

These terminals are of the optional Relay PCB. The contacts are controlled by the<br />

communication link (either Modbus or Profibus).<br />

• L5-Remote control (White) – indicates that the cabinet is controlled remotely. Mounted on the front of<br />

the low voltage compartment door.<br />

• ST – N.O. contact of a push button controls the Start command locally. Mounted on the front of the low<br />

voltage compartment door.<br />

• SP – N.C. contact of a push button controls the Stop command locally. Mounted on the front of the low<br />

voltage compartment door.<br />

• RS – start relay controlled locally or remotely and if no fault is indicated will start the motor via the soft<br />

starter or DOL (depends on the position of selector switch S1).<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


94 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

10.3.1 How Does it Operate?<br />

Selector switches position: Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector is in the Local position and DOL/Soft<br />

Start selector switch is in Soft Start position.<br />

Soft start process is initiated when the Start pushbutton (ST terminals 4 & 3) is pressed.<br />

RS relay is energized (RS terminals 2 & 10). RS N.O. contact (RS terminals 9 & 11), connected in parallel with<br />

the start pushbutton (ST terminals 4 & 3) and holds the relay energized.<br />

Line Contactor C1 and interposing relay RC1 are now energized via another N.O. contact of RS (RS terminals<br />

1 & 3).<br />

Start command to the soft starter is initiated after the Line Contactor is closed (C1 terminals 13 & 14) and via<br />

another N.O. contact of RS (RS terminals 6 & 7) to the soft starter by connecting control voltage to terminals 5<br />

& 6 of the Control Module.<br />

FR relay is energized and energizes the firing transformer via its N.O. contact. (FR terminals 1 & 3)<br />

Relay K1 (IMMEDIATE) is energized immediately after start command is initiated to the soft starter.<br />

The starter ramps up the mains voltage to the motor until it reaches full voltage.<br />

Relay K2 (END OF ACCELERATION) is energized after programmable time delay (default of 5 seconds). The<br />

Bypass Contactor C2 is energized through the N.O. contact of K2 (K2 terminals 6 & 7).<br />

FR relay de-energizes after 2 more seconds and disconnects the firing transformer from the control voltage.<br />

Motor is now running with the Bypass Contactor (C2) closed and the soft starter Power Section is idle.<br />

Soft stop process is initiated when the Stop pushbutton (SP terminals 1 & 2) is pressed.<br />

RS relay is de-energized.<br />

Soft Starter terminals 4 & 5 are disconnected (RS terminals 6 & 7) from the control voltage and cause the soft<br />

starter to enter into soft stop process.<br />

FR relay is energized and energizes the firing transformer via its N.O. contact. (FR terminals 1 & 3)<br />

K2 relay is de-energized.<br />

Bypass Contactor C2 de-energizes via the N.O. contacts of K2 (K2 terminals 6 & 7).<br />

The soft starter ramps down the voltage to the motor.<br />

At the end of the soft stop process the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN de-energizes K1 relay. N.O. contact of K1 (k1 terminals 6 &<br />

7) relay in series with N.O. contact of RC1 (RC1 terminals 1 & 3) act as a holding system to the Line<br />

Contactor C1. This enables the Line Contactor to be energized until the soft stop process is concluded.<br />

FR relay is de-energized and de-energizes the firing transformer via its N.O. contact. (FR terminals 1 & 3)<br />

Upon Fault condition:<br />

If trip condition, is detected by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, K3 is energized. FT and FT/1 are de-energized via N.C. contact<br />

of K3 (K3 terminals 5 & 6) causing RS to trip, C1 to trip and L4 (Fault indication lamp) to turn on.<br />

If trip condition is detected by the external motor protection relay, customer terminals 17 & 18 are opened,<br />

causing FT and FT/1 to be de-energized.<br />

Selector switches position: Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector is in the Remote position and DOL/Soft<br />

Start selector switch is in Soft Start position.<br />

The process is exactly the same as above but RS relay is directly controlled by the remote Start/Stop contacts<br />

(Customer terminals 15 & 16).<br />

WARNING!<br />

When operating the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet from Remote or via the communication<br />

links it is extremely important, because of safety reasons, to monitor the Trip<br />

relay (FT/1 terminals 39-40-41)) indication (See Figure 38 page 91).<br />

When the trip relay signals for trip remove the start command!<br />

Selector switches position: Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector is in the Comm. position and DOL/Soft<br />

Start selector switch is in Soft Start position.<br />

When it is required to control the cabinet via communication (not only to monitor and/or change the<br />

parameters) it is required to install, in additional to the communication PCB (either Modbus or Profibus), an<br />

optional Relay PCB.<br />

When the selector is set to communication control, the RS relay is controlled by a relay located in the optional<br />

Relay PCB mounted in the Control Module.<br />

Output terminals from the optional Relay PCB are 31, 32. Refer also to Figure 13 page 29.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


95 • Commissioning and Operation Manual<br />

Selector switches position: Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector is in the Local or Remote position and<br />

DOL/Soft Start selector switch is in DOL position.<br />

Switch the selector Switch S1 to Bypass position only for testing the cabinet or in rare cases when the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN does not function properly.<br />

When Selector switch S1 is in DOL position, control voltage from terminal 1 of the soft starter is removed thus<br />

the soft starter is not in active. Bypass Contactor C2 is energized.<br />

Start/Stop commands are initiated in the same way as if selector switch S1 is in Soft start.<br />

Notes:<br />

• When selector switch Local/Remote/Comm./Off is in Comm. position and DOL/Soft Start selector switch is in<br />

DOL position it is not possible to control the cabinet.<br />

• When DOL/Soft Start selector switch is in DOL position motor is not protected unless external or internal<br />

protections are installed.<br />

WARNING!<br />

When operating the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet from Remote or via the communication<br />

links it is extremely important, because of safety reasons, to monitor the Trip<br />

relay (FT/1 terminals 39-40-41)) indication (See Figure 38 page 91).<br />

When the trip relay signals for trip remove the start command!<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


96 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />

11. HIGH-POT TEST OF THE <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN CABINET<br />

Note: The high-pot test is performed in the factory as part of the cabinet FAT. (Factory Acceptance<br />

Test). Thus it is not recommended to do the high-pot test at customer site.<br />

High-pot test levels and duration are as follows:<br />

• Up to 3.6kV: 10kVAC for 60 seconds<br />

• Up to 7.2kV: 20kVAC for 60 seconds<br />

• Up to 12kV: 28kVAC for 60 seconds<br />

• Up to 15kV: 38kVAC for 60 seconds<br />

Two options for high-pot test available:<br />

• With the EPT-Tx connected. In this case only one test can be performed when the soft starter is<br />

short connected as one unit (L1 to U, L2 to V, L3 to W and L1 to L2 to L3)<br />

• With EPT-Tx disconnected. In this case it is possible to perform the high-pot test between each<br />

of the phases while the other two phases are grounded.<br />

11.1 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, EPT-Tx Connected<br />

Preparations (refer to Figure 39):<br />

Short circuit the L1B and U busbars of phase L1.<br />

Short circuit the L2B and V busbars of phase L2.<br />

Short circuit the L3B and W busbars of phase L3.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />

Short circuit U, V, W bus bars at the output of the soft starter.<br />

High-pot test procedure:<br />

Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />

Connect the live cable of the High-pot tester to the soft starter basbars.<br />

Set the tester for the correct testing voltage, as specified above.<br />

Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />

Figure 39 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – Preparations for High-pot Test<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


97 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />

Megger test:<br />

You can perform a Megger test (5kVDC) between the three phases connected together as one group<br />

and ground. This Megger test should give a very high resistance result.<br />

You can also perform a Megger test between the three phases. To do this you must connect L1B-U,<br />

L2B-V, L3B-W.<br />

Since the EPT-Tx is connected between the phases, the following resistances are be expected (all<br />

values are ±5%):<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Rated<br />

L1 – L2 L2 – L3 L1 – L3<br />

Voltage<br />

2.3kV 670KΩ 4MΩ 4.67MΩ<br />

3.3kV 1MΩ 6MΩ 7MΩ<br />

4.16kV 1.33MΩ 8MΩ 9.13MΩ<br />

6.6kV 2MΩ 12MΩ 14MΩ<br />

11.2 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV, EPT-Tx Not Connected<br />

High-pot test procedure for L1 (refer to Figure 40):<br />

Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />

Short circuit the L1B and U busbars of phase L1.<br />

Short circuit the L2B and V busbars of phase L2.<br />

Short circuit the L3B and W busbars of phase L3.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />

Connect to ground L2 and L3<br />

Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />

Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L1.<br />

Set the tester to the correct testing voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />

Figure 40 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L1<br />

High-pot test procedure for L2 (refer to Figure 41):<br />

Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />

Short circuit the L1B and U busbars of phase L1.<br />

Short circuit the L2B and V busbars of phase L2.<br />

Short circuit the L3B and W busbars of phase L3.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />

Connect to ground L1 and L3<br />

Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


98 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />

Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L2.<br />

Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />

Figure 41 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L2<br />

High-pot test procedure for L3 (refer to Figure 42):<br />

Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />

Short circuit the L1B and U busbars of phase L1.<br />

Short circuit the L2B and V busbars of phase L2.<br />

Short circuit the L3B and W busbars of phase L3.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />

Connect to ground L1 and L2<br />

Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />

Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L3.<br />

Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />

Figure 42 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx not Connected Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L3<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


Megger test:<br />

You can perform a Megger test (5kVDC) between each phase to ground.<br />

11.3 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up, EPT-Tx Connected<br />

Preparations (refer to Figure 43):<br />

Short circuit the L1 and U busbars of phase L1.<br />

Short circuit the L2 and V busbars of phase L2.<br />

Short circuit the L3 and W busbars of phase L3.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Bypass Contactor.<br />

Short circuit U, V W bus bars at the output of the soft starter.<br />

High-pot test procedure:<br />

Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />

Connect the live cable of the High-pot tester to the soft starter basbars.<br />

Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above.<br />

Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />

99 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />

Figure 43 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up – Preparations for High-pot Test<br />

Note: You are allowed to perform a Megger test (5kVDC) between the three phases connected<br />

together as one group and ground. This Megger test should give a very high resistance result.<br />

You can also perform a Megger test between the three phases. To do so, make sure that the L1-U,<br />

L2-V, L3-W connections are performed.<br />

Since the EPT-Tx is connected between the phases, the following resistances are expected (all<br />

values are ±5%):<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Rated<br />

L1 – L2 L2 – L3 L1 – L3<br />

Voltage<br />

10kV 18MΩ 3MΩ 21MΩ<br />

11kV 20MΩ 3.3MΩ 23.3MΩ<br />

13.2kV 24MΩ 4MΩ 28MΩ<br />

13.8kV 24MΩ 4MΩ 28MΩ<br />

15kV 26MΩ 4.3MΩ 30.3MΩ<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


100 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />

11.4 High-Pot Test in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and Up, EPT-Tx Not Connected<br />

High-pot test procedure for L1 (refer to Figure 44):<br />

Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />

Short circuit the L1 and U busbars of phase L1.<br />

Short circuit the L2 and V busbars of phase L2.<br />

Short circuit the L3 and W busbars of phase L3.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Bypass Contactor.<br />

Connect to ground L2 and L3.<br />

Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />

Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L1.<br />

Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />

Figure 44 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L1<br />

High-pot test procedure for L2 (refer to Figure 45):<br />

Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />

Short circuit the L1 and U busbars of phase L1.<br />

Short circuit the L2 and V busbars of phase L2.<br />

Short circuit the L3 and W busbars of phase L3.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Bypass Contactor.<br />

Connect to ground L1 and L3.<br />

Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to cabinet ground (earth).<br />

Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L2.<br />

Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


101 • High-Pot Test of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Cabinet<br />

Figure 45 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L2<br />

High-pot test procedure for L3 (refer to Figure 46):<br />

Dismantle the EPT-Tx<br />

Short circuit the L1 and U busbars of phase L1.<br />

Short circuit the L2 and V busbars of phase L2.<br />

Short circuit the L3 and W busbars of phase L3.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Line Contactor.<br />

Short circuit input-output phases of the Bypass Contactor.<br />

Connect to ground L1 and L2<br />

Connect the ground cable of the High-pot tester to Cabinet ground (earth).<br />

Connect the live cable of the High-Pot tester to the soft starter busbars of L3.<br />

Set the tester to the correct test voltage, as specified above. Perform the test for 1 minute.<br />

Figure 46 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up, EPT-Tx not Connected, Preparations for High-pot Test, Testing L3<br />

Megger Test:<br />

You can perform a Megger test (5kVDC) between each phase to ground.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


102 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />

12. TEST PROCEDURE FOR LOW VOLTAGE TESTING<br />

12.1 Accessories Required for LOW VOLTAGE Testing of the Starter and Cabinet.<br />

Control cable – three wires (two wires+ground) and a switch, to connect the control voltage (110VAC,<br />

230VAC, 115VDC, 125VDC or 220VDC).<br />

Note: Rated power of the control power source should be 2.5kW minimum. This will ensure all inrush<br />

current to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will not cause voltage drop to the control circuitry.<br />

Power cable - four wires (3 phase + ground) cable + fused three phase switch, to connect the low voltage<br />

400VAC three phase mains voltage to the cabinet. Prepare one side of the cable with a connector to the<br />

mains voltage according to the type of connectors used in the field. The other side with cable lugs or, more<br />

conveniently, with adequate alligator clips suit the bus bar size.<br />

Note: If low voltage mains is generated by a step up or step down transformer, its kVA should be 10 times<br />

greater than the testing motor kVA. Otherwise, the mains (low) voltage may be heavily distorted and<br />

prevent proper operation of the soft starter.<br />

Start / Stop toggle switch with 2 wire cable, to simulate the remote Start / Stop contact.<br />

Three phase 400VAC induction motor 5 -10KW. The motor should be loaded by a fan or any other kind of<br />

inertia (fly wheel).<br />

Digital multimeter.<br />

Test Harness with three colored wires (supplied with the cabinet, located in a small plastic bag in the<br />

drawings pocket).<br />

Note: Test harnesses for other than 400VAC (in the range of 440VAC to 690VAC) can be ordered. The<br />

test voltage (if other than the standard 400V), is indicated on the tape of the test harness.<br />

12.2 Notes and Warnings<br />

Notes:<br />

• The starter and the cabinet are designed to ensure a complete, convenient and safe test procedure for the<br />

starter and for the cabinet, using only the above accessories.<br />

• The next procedure should be used for the following:<br />

o To ensure that the unit functions properly.<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

To learn the operational modes and options of the cabinet.<br />

To test the cabinet together with the external control system (Factory Scada system, external<br />

PLC, etc.) It is strongly recommended to perform as many tests as possible in the low voltage<br />

mode to debug the external control system hardware and software in this low voltage mode<br />

until the entire system operates satisfactorily.<br />

To debug the system in a rare event of a problem in the starter, cabinet or control system.<br />

WARNING!<br />

• Make sure that Medium voltage is disconnected and secured.<br />

• Check that the test control voltage is equal to the rated control voltage.<br />

• Immediate damage can be expected if the control voltage level is incorrect.<br />

• Check that the three phase mains testing voltage is equal to 400VAC, which is<br />

the standard testing voltage. An immediate damage can be expected if the<br />

mains voltage is not 400VAC±10%.<br />

• Read the soft starter instruction <strong>manual</strong> carefully as well as the optional Motor<br />

Protection Relay (MPR) instruction <strong>manual</strong>, If installed.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


103 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />

12.3 Low Voltage Test Procedure<br />

1. Disconnect mains voltage from the soft <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet.<br />

2. Ground the medium voltage lines.<br />

3. Put warning signs that will prevent anyone from connecting the medium voltage lines to<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet.<br />

4. The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet inputs bus bars (marked L1, L2, L3).should be free from any<br />

connection.<br />

Do not ground them, since low testing voltage should be connected to these input lines.<br />

5. Disconnect the medium voltage Motor lines from the output bus bars of the cabinet<br />

(marked U, V, W).<br />

6. Visual test. Make sure that there is:<br />

6.1. No mechanical damage<br />

6.2. No loose screws<br />

6.3. No excessive dust<br />

6.4. No loose parts.<br />

6.5. No cut wires<br />

6.6. No open fiber optic wires<br />

6.7. No broken insulators<br />

7. Connect the safety ground to the cabinet.<br />

8. Double check that the cabinet is free from any voltage connection and is disconnected<br />

also from the medium voltage motor.<br />

9. Disassemble the clear plastic cover in the front of the starter Power Section.<br />

10. Connect the low voltage test harness:<br />

10.1. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV:<br />

Refer to section 12.3.2.1 page 106.<br />

10.2. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN 10kV and up:<br />

Refer to section 12.3.2.2 page 107.<br />

11. Connect the motor cable to the output bus bars U, V, W.<br />

12. Connect the control voltage cable (equipped with switch) to customer terminals 1 & 2<br />

located in customer terminal compartment.<br />

13. Connect three phase cable (equipped with switch) to the input bus bars (L1, L2, L3),<br />

upstream the Line Contactor (so that voltage is disconnected from starter, when the<br />

contactor is open).<br />

14. Connect the remote control switch wires to customer terminals 15 & 16 located in<br />

customer terminal compartment.<br />

15. Turn on the two MCBs located in the top-left side of the low voltage section (marked e1<br />

and e2).<br />

16. Verify that the Emergency push button is in the normal operating position.<br />

17. Set DOL/Soft Start selector switch (S1) to Soft Starter position.<br />

18. Set the Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector switch (S2) to Local.<br />

19. Turn on the control voltage switch.<br />

20. The Control Module should be powered now.<br />

21. Verify that the remote control indication light (L5) on the external door is turned off.<br />

22. Get familiar with the soft starter settings, using its instruction <strong>manual</strong>.<br />

23. Press the Reset buttons on the soft starter Control Module panel and on the optional<br />

MPR panel.<br />

24. Enter MAIN & PROTECT. parameters. set:<br />

RATED LINE VOLT. – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />

STARTER FLC – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />

MOTOR FLA – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />

Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE MAIN &<br />

PROTECT.<br />

Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />

25. Enter START parameters, set:<br />

SOFT START CURVE – set to 1 (standard)<br />

INITIAL VOLTGE – set to 10%<br />

NUMBER OF STARTS – set to OFF (to enable unlimited number of starts with the low<br />

voltage motor)<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


104 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />

Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE START<br />

PARAMETERS.<br />

Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />

26. Enter STOP parameters, set:<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE – set to 1 (standard)<br />

DEC. TIME – set to 10SEC.<br />

Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE STOP<br />

PARAMETERS.<br />

Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />

27. Turn off the control voltage.<br />

28. Release the four screws at the corners of the front panel of the soft starter control unit.<br />

Remove the front panel. Refer to Figure 15 page 40. Identify Main PCB - PC2050 and<br />

Fiberoptic PCB – PC2055.<br />

29. On the Main PCB – PC2050 set the required interface language on the display, you<br />

need to change the position of dip switches 5 & 6. Refer to section 6.4.3 page 41.<br />

30. On the Fiberoptic PCB – PC2055 set the Current gain dip switches for low voltage<br />

motor testing. Refer to section 12.3.1 page 106:<br />

Dip Switch #1 Dip Switch #2 Gain<br />

ON ON 1<br />

ON OFF 5<br />

OFF ON 13.4<br />

OFF OFF 67<br />

31. Re-check that the Gain dip switches of the three phases are set identically.<br />

32. Tilt back the display and re-install the front panel.<br />

33. While 400VAC mains voltage is still not connected to the cabinet, press the Start push<br />

button. The Line Contactor (C1) is energized for a short time and then trips. UNDER /<br />

NO VOLTAGE message is displayed on the screen of the soft starter’s control unit.<br />

Fault lamp lights on the external door.<br />

34. Press Reset on the Control Module. The fault indications are distinguished.<br />

35. Turn on the (three phase) mains low voltage.<br />

36. Verify that the Line Contactor is open and indication light on the external door is lit.<br />

37. Press the Start push button. The Line Contactor is energized and after a short time the<br />

soft start process begin. the LINE CONTACTOR ON indication light will indicate that<br />

the contactor is now closed. Since the motor is not heavily loaded, the starter enters<br />

RUN conditions in few seconds. After few more seconds(adjustable), the Bypass<br />

Contactor closes and the BYPASS CONTACTOR ON indication light is on.<br />

38. If the motor is not equipped with loading inertia and/or is not loaded, it may vibrate<br />

mechanically while reaching full speed. If this is the case, make sure that the motor is<br />

not too small, and that SOFT START CURVE 1!! is used. Also make sure that the Gain<br />

dip switches are in the correct position. If it does not help enough, try to replace motor<br />

with a loaded one (like a fan motor).<br />

39. Press the Stop pushbutton.<br />

The Bypass Contactor opens and the starter ramps down the voltage to the motor. At<br />

the end of the soft stop process, the Line Contactor opens and the motor slows down to<br />

a stop.<br />

Note: Since the motor is not loaded it may be seen, in the soft stop process that the motor<br />

runs normally and then stops just at the end of the soft stop process. Using a low current<br />

clamp ammeter it can be seen that during the soft stop process, motor current is reduced to<br />

approximately one half of its value while running before the soft stop process.<br />

40. Enter START parameters, set:<br />

ACC. TIME – set to 20sec.<br />

CURRENT LIMIT – set to 300%<br />

Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE START<br />

PARAMETERS.<br />

Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />

Start the motor again and note that motor accelerates slower.<br />

41. When the motor is stopped, change the Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector switch (S2)<br />

to Remote. Now, the external Start / Stop pushbuttons have no effect. Verify that<br />

REMOTE indication light on the external door is lit on.<br />

42. Repeat the start / stop process using the external remote control switch.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


105 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />

43. When the motor is stopped, change the Local/Remote/Comm./Off selector switch (S2)<br />

to Comm. Now, the external Start / Stop pushbuttons have no effect. Verify that<br />

REMOTE indication light on the external door is off.<br />

44. Repeat the start / stop process using the communication link.<br />

45. While the motor is stopped, change the DOL/Soft Start selector switch (S1) to DOL.<br />

Bypass Contactor C2 closes immediately. The Control Module is not powered now.<br />

Start the motor and notice that motor speed rise to maximum “at once” since it gets full<br />

voltage immediately when mains contactor C1 is closed.<br />

46. When the motor is stopped, set DOL/Soft Start selector switch (S1) to Soft Starter<br />

position and set the Local/Remote/Off selector switch (S2) to Local.<br />

47. Set the optional Motor Protection Relay (MPR) according to customer’s preferences.<br />

Note that the MPR cannot sense the start and run process, since the testing low voltage<br />

motor current is very low if compared to the rated current of the medium voltage motor.<br />

48. Clearing out of the low voltage test:<br />

48.1. Verify that both mains and control voltages are turned off and their plugs are pulled<br />

out.<br />

48.2. Disconnect the Test Harness from the EPT transmitter. Put it back in the small<br />

plastic bag and return to the drawing pocket.<br />

48.3. Disconnect mains, motor and control external cables.<br />

48.4. Reconnect power cables to the mains.<br />

48.5. Connect motor cables to the output bus bars.<br />

48.6. Re-assemble the clear plastic cover on top of the starter Power Section.<br />

48.7. Close the medium voltage compartment doors and secure the screws.<br />

48.8. Open the front panel of the Control Module of the soft starter. Loosen the 4 screws<br />

that hold the display in place then tilt it forward. this will give you access to the dip<br />

switches on the PC2055. Set the dip switches to ON. Tilt back the display and<br />

fasten its four screws. Reinstall the front panel of the Control Module.<br />

48.9. Connect control voltage to the cabinet.<br />

48.10. Enter TEST/MAINTENANCE OPTIONS (press Mode+) press Select 3 times until<br />

STORE NOW? DEFAULT SETTINGS shows. Press Mode+Store. Verify that DATA<br />

SAVED OK message appears.<br />

48.11. Enter TEST/MAINTENANCE OPTIONS (press Mode+) press Select 4 times until<br />

CLEAR NOW? STATISTICAL DATA shows. Press Reset+Store. Verify that DATA<br />

SAVED OK message appears.<br />

48.12. Enter TEST/MAINTENANCE OPTIONS (press Mode+) press Select 5 times until<br />

the clock adjustment display is shown. Set the time and date correctly.<br />

48.13. Enter MAIN & PROTECT. parameters. set:<br />

RATED LINE VOLT. – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />

STARTER FLC – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />

MOTOR FLA – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />

RATED MOTOR PWR – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />

SERVICE FACTOR – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />

Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE MAIN &<br />

PROTECT.<br />

Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />

48.14. Enter START parameters, set the parameters as required for the medium voltage<br />

motor.<br />

If no other data is available, leave all parameters in their default values.<br />

48.15. Enter STOP parameters, set the parameters as required for the medium voltage<br />

motor. If Soft Stop process is used it is recommended to use same curve as for Soft<br />

Start.<br />

48.16. To ensure that there were no mistakes in storing the parameters, it is advised to turn<br />

off the control voltage and then turn it on, after 10 seconds.<br />

Verify that all above parameters are properly stored.<br />

Verify that statistical data is erased. (NO DATA message is displayed when<br />

browsing the STATISTICAL DATA)<br />

48.17. Turn off Control voltage.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


106 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />

12.3.1 Current Gain Dip Switches Setting<br />

The unit is factory calibrated to the rated current of the starter. For example, if the rated current is 320A then<br />

the rated current of the low voltage motor used for testing would be 6A. The ratio between these current<br />

values is 53. In order to enable testing with that low level of current, additional gain should be added to the<br />

current path. To do so, loosen the four screws holding the display case that covers the upper Printed Circuit<br />

Board (PCB). Slide out the top while the two bottom screws are used as a shaft. On the right side of the<br />

PCB, there are three couples of Gain dip switches. Each pair is for a single phase. Note that all Gain dip<br />

switches are set to ON. Gain dip switch # 1 when set to off (for testing) adds gain of 5. Gain dip switch # 2<br />

when set to off, adds gain of 13.4. By setting both to OFF, a gain of 5x13.4=67 is added. Set the Gain dip<br />

switches according to the ratio between rated starting current and the motor rated current. In the above<br />

example of 320A versus 6A, set both Gain dip switches on each phase to OFF. Refer to Figure 47 below.<br />

12.3.2 Test Harness Installation<br />

Figure 47 – Current Gain Dip Switches Location<br />

Warning: The Standard test harness is designed for testing with low voltage mains, rated 400V.<br />

When the test harness is ordered for higher than 400V, internal resistors are normally connected<br />

in the middle of the wires. Never use the standard 400V Test Harness to perform low voltage tests<br />

with test voltages that exceed 400V . Higher than the specified voltage may cause damage to the<br />

EPT transmitter.<br />

12.3.2.1 Test Harness Installation in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV<br />

The Test Harness includes three colored wires: blue, red and green wires.<br />

These wires are used to change the resistors voltage dividing ratio in the EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential<br />

Transformer Transmitter).<br />

At one end of each colored wire there is banana plug with the same color as of the wire.<br />

At the second end of the blue wire there is an alligator clip.<br />

The second end of the red and green wires are clamped together and connected to a second alligator clip.<br />

On the front side of the EPT-Tx you will see three colored round stickers: blue, red and green stickers.<br />

On the rear side of the EPT-Tx, exactly at same location as the stickers, there are three small holes. These<br />

holes have an internal banana jacks for the banana plugs.<br />

Connect the three banana plugs the banana jacks at the rear side of the EPT-Tx. Ensure that the wire colors<br />

match the round sticker colors at the front of the EPT-Tx.<br />

Connect the alligator clip marked “1”, with red and green wires to phase L1.<br />

Connect the alligator clip marked “3”, with blue wire to phase L3.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


107 • Test Procedure for Low Voltage Testing<br />

The Test Harness is equipped with a long warning tape, intended to prevent forgetting it connected.<br />

Never cut this warning tape. Leave the warning tape open for its full length and laid in such a way<br />

that the harness will not be connected accidentally after the low voltage test.<br />

As a rule, always disconnect the harness immediately after ending the low voltage test. It should be<br />

mounted inside a small plastic bag in the drawing pocket mounted on the front door.<br />

Refer to Figure 48 below.<br />

EPT-Tx – bus bars in front of the EPT-Tx<br />

Test harness<br />

Figure 48 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV – EPT-Tx and Test Harness<br />

12.3.2.2 Test Harness Installation in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN from 10kV and up<br />

The Test Harness includes three colored wires: blue, red and green.<br />

These wires are used to change the resistor voltages dividing ratio in the EPT-Tx (Electronic Potential<br />

Transformer Transmitter).<br />

At one end of each colored wire there is banana plug with the same color as the wire.<br />

At the other end of the blue wire there is an alligator clip.<br />

The other end of the red and green wires are clamped together and connected to a second alligator clip.<br />

On the front side of the EPT-Tx you will see three colored round stickers: blue, red and green.<br />

These stickers are located near three small holes. These holes have internal banana jacks for the banana<br />

plugs.<br />

Connect the three banana plugs to the banana jacks near the colored stickers at the front side of the EPT-Tx.<br />

Ensure that the wire and banana plugs colors match the round sticker near the hole.<br />

Connect the alligator clip marked “1”, with blue wire to phase L1.<br />

Connect the alligator clip marked “3”, with red and green wires to phase L3.<br />

The Test Harness is equipped with a long warning tape, intended to prevent forgetting it connected. Never cut<br />

this warning tape. Leave the warning tape open for its full length and laid in such a way that the harness will<br />

not be connected accidentally after the low voltage test.<br />

As a rule, always disconnect the harness immediately after ending the low voltage test. It should be mounted<br />

inside a small plastic bag in the drawing pocket mounted on the front door.<br />

Refer to Error! Reference source not found.below.<br />

EPT-Tx – EPT-Tx in front of the busbars<br />

Test harness<br />

Figure 49 – <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN From 10kV and up – EPT-Tx and Test Harness<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


108 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />

13. START PROCEDURE FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR<br />

13.1 Special Attention Notes<br />

Special<br />

Attention!<br />

• Make sure that you know where the Emergency stop button is located, so you<br />

can stop immediately if needed.<br />

• Verify that the Emergency stop button is operative and pushing the Emergency<br />

stop button disconnecting the motor from the mains.<br />

• During the entire starting time you should continuously read the three currents<br />

as shown on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN LCD display. They should show, more or less same<br />

values.<br />

• If the currents are significantly different - STOP IMMEDIATELY. Do not wait the<br />

total start time until a trip occurs.<br />

• Verify that NUMBER OF STARTS parameter is set to 1 and STARTS PERIOD<br />

is set to 20.<br />

Remember ! Do not start too often, especially if the starting time is long.<br />

Prevent damage to both motor and starter !<br />

• Carefully read the Soft Starter <strong>Instruction</strong> Manual as well as the optional Motor<br />

Protection Relay (MPR) <strong>Instruction</strong> Manual if installed.<br />

• When mains voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, even if control voltage is<br />

disconnected, full voltage appear on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN load terminals. Therefore,<br />

for isolation purposes, it is necessary to connect an isolating device upstream to<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

• Power factor correction capacitors must not be installed on the load side of the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. When required, install capacitors on the line side of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

• Do not interchange line and load connections. Verify correct connections to the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN terminals: L1, L2, L3, L1b, L2b, L3b, U, V, W.<br />

• Before starting the motor verify its rotation direction. If needed, disconnect the<br />

rotor from the mechanical load and verify the correct direction of rotation.<br />

• Prior to start up procedure, make sure that line voltage and control voltage<br />

match the ones shown on the label of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

• When the Start signal is initiated and a motor is not connected to load terminals,<br />

the S. SCR OR WR. CON protection will be activated. Other loads such as<br />

incandescent light bulbs, resistors, etc. may also cause a S. SCR OR WR. CON<br />

fault.<br />

13.2 Prior to Commissioning in Medium Voltage<br />

Verify that the Full Load Ampere (FLA) of the motor is lower than or equal to the Full Load Current (FLC) of<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, and that the mains and control voltages are as indicated on the side and/or front label of the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Verify that <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC ≥ motor FLA!<br />

Verify that mains voltage is correct!<br />

Verify that control voltage is correct!<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label - example<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


109 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />

13.3 Medium Voltage Test Procedure<br />

1. Verify that a Megger test was performed to the motor and its cables. This test should be carried<br />

when the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is not connected to the motor.<br />

2. Verify that low voltage Test Harness and cables are disconnected and removed.<br />

3. Verify that all 6 Gain dip switches on the fiberoptic PCB (PC2055) are set to ON.<br />

4. Enter MAIN & PROTECT. parameters. set:<br />

RATED LINE VOLT. – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />

STARTER FLC – As indicated on the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN label<br />

MOTOR FLA – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />

RATED MOTOR PWR – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />

SERVICE FACTOR – As indicated on the medium voltage motor label.<br />

Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE MAIN & PROTECT.<br />

Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />

5. Enter START parameters, set the parameters as required for the medium voltage motor.<br />

If no other data is available, leave all parameters in their default values.<br />

Verify that NUMBER OF STARTS parameter is set to 1.<br />

Remember ! Do not start too often, especially if starting time is long. Prevent damage to both<br />

motor and starter !<br />

Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE START PARAMETERS.<br />

Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />

6. Enter STOP parameters.<br />

If Soft Stop process is required it is recommended to use same SOFT STOP CURVE as SOFT<br />

START CURVE.<br />

Set DEC. TIME<br />

If soft stop is not required, set Deceleration time (DEC. TIME) to minimum value (0 seconds).<br />

Browse all the way down until you see the message: STORE ENABLE STOP PARAMETERS.<br />

Press the Store button and wait for the message: DATA SAVED OK.<br />

7. Verify that all other parameters are setting properly for the application.<br />

8. Return the screen to the current display (first currents reading screen is in % OF MOTOR FLA).<br />

9. Be sure to know where an Emergency stop button is located, so you can stop immediately if<br />

needed.<br />

10. It is strongly recommended that another person stand near the motor and have cellular (or other)<br />

contact with you. He should be authorized to stop immediately (if a remote stop button is<br />

available) or to ask you to immediately stop in any case where an unusual mechanical noise is<br />

heard.<br />

11. During the entire starting time you should continuously read the three currents as shown on the<br />

starter’s display. They should show, more or less same values.<br />

12. If the currents are significantly different - STOP IMMEDIATELY. Do not wait the total start time<br />

until a trip occurs.<br />

13. In any problem occurs, look at the following troubleshooting instructions.<br />

14. It is strongly recommended to go back to the low voltage test if in doubt.<br />

15. After successful starting, with real load, set MAX START TIME (in START PARAMETERS<br />

page) to few seconds above the actual time seen in the STATISTICAL DATA page, to prevent<br />

starter and motor overheating if load is increased and motor cannot start.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


110 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />

13.4 Standard Starting Process<br />

Apply START command<br />

Motor starts to turn<br />

shortly after START<br />

No<br />

Increase INITIAL VOLTAGE and start again<br />

Yes<br />

Initial inrush current or<br />

mechanical shock is<br />

too high?<br />

Yes<br />

Decrease INITIAL VOLTAGE and start again<br />

No<br />

Speed accelerates<br />

smoothly to nominal?<br />

No<br />

Current during<br />

acceleration is too<br />

high?<br />

No<br />

Motor speed does not<br />

accelerate to nominal?<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

Yes<br />

No<br />

Decrease CURRENT LIMIT<br />

Increase CURRENT LIMIT<br />

Apply the STOP command and wait until the motor stops.<br />

Slightly increase INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />

A<br />

See next page<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


111 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />

A<br />

Apply the START command<br />

Motor acceleration time<br />

to full speed is as<br />

required?<br />

No<br />

If acceleration time is too short, increase<br />

ACCELARATION TIME setting and/or decrease<br />

CURRENT LIMIT setting (when decreasing CURRENT<br />

LIMIT, make sure that the motor increases speed<br />

gradually and does not stall).<br />

Yes<br />

• Check LAST START PERIOD and set MAX. START TIME to approximately 5 seconds<br />

longer than the LAST START PERIOD.<br />

• For future reference it is advised to keep records of the following parameters in the<br />

STATISTICAL DATA:<br />

LAST START PERIOD<br />

LAST START MAX I<br />

13.5 Examples of Starting Curves<br />

13.5.1 Light Loads - Pumps, Etc.<br />

(In these cases the actual current is always lower than the CURRENT LIMIT setting)<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE- set to 30%<br />

CURRENT LIMIT - set to 300-350%<br />

ACCELERATION TIME- set to 10 sec.<br />

Upon start, the voltage quickly increases to the INITIAL VOLTAGE value (30% of Un) and then gradually<br />

ramps-up to nominal.<br />

The current will simultaneously increase to peak current value (lower than the CURRENT LIMIT setting),<br />

before smoothly decreasing to the operating current.<br />

13.5.2 High Inertia Loads: Crushers, Centrifuges, Mixers, Etc.<br />

(In these cases the actual current is at the CURRENT LIMIT setting during part of the starting time)<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE– set 40%<br />

CURRENT LIMIT– set 400%<br />

ACCELERATION TIME– set 3 sec<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


112 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />

Upon START the voltage and current increase until the current reaches the CURRENT LIMIT value. The<br />

voltage remains at this value until the motor reaches close to nominal speed, where current starts to decrease<br />

and voltage continues to ramp-up to nominal.<br />

13.5.3 Special Starting Using DUAL ADJUSTMENT<br />

Using two starting characteristics, the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will accelerate using standard characteristics (INITIAL<br />

VOLTAGE, ACCELERATION TIME and CURRENT LIMIT). After transition (tx) (IMMEDIATE relay delay),<br />

voltage to input terminal 8 is switched on using the DUAL ADJUSTMENT characteristic to complete<br />

acceleration.<br />

Perform the following steps:<br />

• To use DUAL ADJUSTMENT automatically, connect IMMEDIATE in series to input terminal 8 as shown in<br />

section 13.5.3.1 below.<br />

• Program IMMEDIATE/SHEAR-PIN relay to IMMEDIATE (default setting) and program RELAY ON DELAY to<br />

tx.<br />

• Program PROG. INPUT #8 to DUAL ADJUSTMENT (default setting).<br />

• Program standard parameters and DUAL ADJUSTMENT parameters as shown in the table below.<br />

Using two starting characteristics, the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will accelerate to reach the 200% current limit. After tx<br />

voltage to PROG. INPUT #8 is switched on, using the DUAL ADJUSTMENT characteristic to complete<br />

acceleration.<br />

Parameter Main Setting DUAL ADJUSTMENT Setting<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE 10% 25%<br />

ACCELERATION TIME t1 = 2-30 sec t2 = 2-30 sec<br />

CURRENT LIMIT 200% 300-400%<br />

RELAY ON DELAY tx = 1-60 sec. -----<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


113 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />

13.5.3.1 Special Starting – Using DUAL ADJUSTMENT – Wiring Diagram<br />

13.5.4 Choosing a Suitable Pump Curve (Centrifugal Pumps)<br />

13.5.4.1 Starting Curve<br />

• Adjust MAIN PARAMETERS as necessary (FLA, FLC, etc.).<br />

• Set STARTING CURVE, ACCELERATION TIME, CURRENT LIMIT, and INITIAL VOLTAGE to their default<br />

values (curve 1, 10 sec., 400% and 30% respectively).<br />

• Start the pump while watching the pressure gauge as the pump starts and look for overshooting (“pressure<br />

surge”) of the gauge needle above the target pressure. In case of over pressure, choose a peak torque<br />

reduction curve (SOFT START CURVE 2!!).<br />

• Set SOFT START CURVE 2!!, increase ACCELERATION TIME to 15 seconds and reduce CURRENT LIMIT<br />

to 350%. Start the pump and watch the pressure gauge while the pump starts.<br />

• In most cases, overshooting is reduced. If the overshoot persists, increase ACCELERATION TIME to 25<br />

seconds (confirm with motor manufacturer) and try again.<br />

• If the overpressure persists, increase the SOFT START CURVE setting to 3!!, or 4!!, if necessary. Each<br />

increase in the SOFT START CURVE setting will reduce the peak torque, thus reducing the overpressure<br />

and preventing “pressure surge” during start.<br />

13.5.4.2 Stopping Curve<br />

• Adjust MAIN PARAMETERS as necessary (FLA, FLC, etc.)<br />

• Set SOFT STOP CURVE and DECELERATION TIME, to their default values (curve 1, 10 sec.,<br />

respectively).<br />

• Stop the pump, watching the pressure gauge and check valve as the pump stops. Look for overshooting<br />

(“water hammer”) of the gauge (abruptly stops the pump and the motor).<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


114 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />

• Select SOFT STOP CURVE 2!! and increase DECELERATION TIME to 15 seconds. Stop the pump and<br />

watch the pressure gauge and the rate of closing of the check valve as the pump stops. Abrupt stopping of<br />

the pump and motor will cause a loud audible noise emitted from the check valve.<br />

• In most cases, “water hammer” is reduced. If “water hammer” persists, increase the time to 25 seconds<br />

(confirm with motor manufacturer) and try again.<br />

• If “water hammer” persists, increase the SOFT STOP CURVE setting to 3!!, or 4!!. Each increase in the<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE will reduce the abrupt stop of the pump, thus preventing the “water hammer”<br />

phenomenon.<br />

13.5.4.3 FINAL TORQUE During Soft-Stopping a Pump Motor<br />

While decelerating, the check valve may close before DECELERATION TIME has elapsed, thus allowing<br />

current to flow through stator winding causing unnecessary heat. Select FINAL TORQUE sensitivity to 1 and<br />

stop the pump, then confirm that the current stopped flowing through the motor shortly after the check valve<br />

closed.<br />

If current still flows more than 3-5 seconds after check valve closure, increase FINAL TORQUE (up to a<br />

maximum value of 10) to stop current flow earlier.<br />

13.6 How to set MPS-3000 and DPM-10 when installed with <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

If MPS-3000 (Solcon motor protection) and/or DPM-10 (Solcon digital power meter) are integrated in the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet in a way that voltage readings are from the EPT and current measurements are from the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN internal CTs special attention must be given to the setting of these units.<br />

Before setting the MPS-3000, read the MPS-3000 instruction <strong>manual</strong>.<br />

Before setting the DPM-10, read the DPM-10 instruction <strong>manual</strong>.<br />

If the MPS and DPM-10 use separate (not the internal soft starter) CTs and PTs (current and voltage<br />

transformers), then set all MPS and DPM-10 parameters according to the instruction <strong>manual</strong>.<br />

If, however the MPS and DPM-10 use the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Internal CTs and Electronic Potential Transformer (EPT),<br />

a number of parameter settings must be performed as explained below.<br />

Inside the soft starter, there is an EPT. Its “primary” rated voltage is equal to the starter rated voltage. Its<br />

“secondary” rated voltage is 120VAC.<br />

Inside the soft starter, special CTs are used. Their primary rated current equals to the starter rated current.<br />

Their secondary rated current is 2A. The secondary current is connected to the MPS-3000 5A input and to the<br />

DPM-10 5A input.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


In the MPS-3000 SYSTEM PARAMETER setting page, please set:<br />

115 • Start Procedure for Medium voltage Motor<br />

LINE VOLTS<br />

VT PRIMARY<br />

VT SECONDARY<br />

MOTOR FLC<br />

CT PRIMARY<br />

GND CT PRIMARY<br />

= Actual rated line voltage (should be equal or lower than starter rated voltage).<br />

= Starter rated voltage (the Electronic Potential Transformer is calibrated to<br />

the starter rated voltage).<br />

= 120 (the EPT “secondary” rated voltage).<br />

= Actual Motor Name Plate (Rated) current (should be equal or lower than<br />

starter rated current).<br />

= 2.5 x Starter Rated Current. (See note 1 below)<br />

= same as CT PRIMARY setting.<br />

In the DPM-10 PARAMETER setting page, please set:<br />

P+ (Potential Transformer ratio) = Ratio between Primary and secondary of the P/T. Set to: Vn/120.<br />

If, for example Vn=3300V then set to: 3300/120=27.5.<br />

C+ (C.Ts Primary) = 2.5 x Starter Rated Current.<br />

Explanation of CT PRIMARY: If The rated starter current is - for example - 1000A, its CTs (that are used<br />

also for the MPS and DPM-10) are 1000 / 2A.<br />

Please note that CTs secondary current is 2A, not 5A as of the DPM-10 and as of the MPS-3000 (See note 1<br />

below).<br />

When 1000A flows, the DPM-10 and MPS-3000 gets only 2A instead 5A and will calculate 2 / 5 x1000 = 400A.<br />

Therefore we have to set the CT Primary to 1000x(5/2)=2500, which with 2A will read exactly 1000A as<br />

required.<br />

Notes:<br />

1. In the MPS-3000 there is a second set of current transformers with a secondary of 1A. (Terminals 82,<br />

85, 88 and 91).<br />

In this case, when 1000A flows, the MPS-3000 gets 2A instead 1A and will calculate 2 / 1 x1000 = 2000A.<br />

Therefore we have to set the CT Primary to 1000x(1/2)= 500, which with 2A will read exactly 1000A as<br />

required.<br />

2. In the MPS-3000 and DPM-10, each parameter has to be stored separately (while in the soft starter<br />

you store all parameters of a page together).<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


116 • Trouble Shooting<br />

14. TROUBLE SHOOTING<br />

The following procedures should be done only upon fault and in case trouble shooting is required.<br />

14.1 In-Out Resistance and Cathode-Cathode Resistance<br />

Verify that the motor is disconnected.<br />

Disconnect the cabinet mains isolator switch or fuses, if installed.<br />

In-Out resistances should be the same for all three phases in each model. Cathode-Cathode<br />

resistances are indicated in the following table:<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Rated<br />

Voltage<br />

L1 – U<br />

L2 - V<br />

L3 - W<br />

Cathode-Cathode<br />

2.3kV 1.2MΩ ±10% 1/2 of In-Out resistance<br />

3.3kV 135kΩ ±10%<br />

1/3 of In-Out resistance<br />

4.16kV 135kΩ ±10%<br />

6.6kV 300kΩ ±10%<br />

10kV 420kΩ ±10%<br />

11kV 450kΩ ±10%<br />

13.2kV 500kΩ ±10%<br />

13.8kV 500kΩ ±10%<br />

15kV 550kΩ ±10%<br />

1/5 or 1/6 of In-Out<br />

resistance. (depends<br />

on number of thyristors<br />

in the soft starter)<br />

Refer to Figure 50 In order to identify the Cathode terminals of all 6 SCRs on the firing PCB.<br />

A number is written on the firing PCB to identify the SCRs.<br />

Measure Cathode-Cathode resistances as follows:<br />

Cathode SCR#1 to Cathode SCR#4<br />

Cathode SCR#2 to Cathode SCR#5<br />

Cathode SCR#3 to Cathode SCR#6<br />

Verify that values correspond to the above table.<br />

14.2 Rgk (thyristors Gate-Cathode) Resistances.<br />

Thyristors Gate-Cathode resistances can easily be measured from the firing PCBs.<br />

In order to access the testing points the front cover of the Power Section needs to be dismantled.<br />

Gate-Cathode connection points of SCR#1 are illustrated in Figure 50. Measure all SCRs’ Rgk<br />

resistances in each of the phases.<br />

Rgk values should be about the same for all thyristors in the phase, and in the range of 7-20 Ω.<br />

Figure 50 – Firing PCB – SCR#1 Gate-Cathode Testing<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


14.3 Firing Test<br />

The purpose of this test is to check that the firing system of all thyristors functions properly.<br />

This procedure requires control supply voltage only (No need for mains three phases).<br />

• Disconnect mains. Verify all safety issues are<br />

resolved.<br />

• Open 10 hexagon head white plastic screws<br />

holding the front cover of all 3 phases.<br />

• Dismantle front cover of all three phases<br />

117 • Trouble Shooting<br />

• Identify 6 green LEDs and 6 red LEDs as<br />

shown in the picture.<br />

Number of LEDs varies for different voltages<br />

models.<br />

• Program input #7 to TEST. (Remember to<br />

store the parameter!) Refer to section 7.8.7<br />

page 71.<br />

• Connect control input voltage to terminal #7.<br />

The Test LED on the control keypad will lit.<br />

Refer to section 5.12 page 37.<br />

• Press the Mode key until the following appears<br />

in the display :<br />

FIRING TEST<br />

DISCONNECT MAINS<br />

Green<br />

LEDs<br />

Red<br />

LEDs<br />

Press the Select button.<br />

The display will show:<br />

FIRING PWR SUPPLY<br />

CHECK GREEN LEDS<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


118 • Trouble Shooting<br />

Press the Select button a second time.<br />

The display will show:<br />

FIRING NOW CHECK<br />

GREEN & RED LEDS<br />

Press the Select button a third time.<br />

The display will show:<br />

FIRING NOW CHECK<br />

ALL LEDS OF R&S<br />

Press the Select button a fourth time.<br />

The display will show:<br />

FIRING NOW CHECK<br />

ALL LEDS OF S&T<br />

Press the Select button a fifth time.<br />

The display will show:<br />

FIRING NOW CHECK<br />

ALL LEDS OF R&T<br />

Note:<br />

• The firing test is limited to 30 seconds. If you did not manage to conclude the test you can repeat until all 5<br />

stages are done.<br />

If the firing test fails:<br />

• Check the fuses in the switch mode power supplies (PC2075 for AC control voltage, PC2076 for DC control<br />

voltage). Refer to section 10.2.4 page 89 for fuse locations.<br />

Note: DC control voltage uses all three fuses in a series, so if one fails to operate, all firing LEDs can’t light.<br />

• Check that fiber optic wires # 1, 3 and 5 (firing phases 1, 2 and 3) are properly connected according to the<br />

markings on the Control Module.<br />

• Check that they are inserted into their connectors to the full depth and not damaged .<br />

• Check that the fiber optic wires of the power modules that are connected between the individual power<br />

supplies (PC2075 or PC2076) and the firing PCBs are properly inserted.<br />

• When Control Voltage is turned ON, the green LEDs in the power modules may blink shortly. This is normal.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


119 • Trouble Shooting<br />

14.4 Low Voltage Test Trouble Shooting<br />

Problem<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control<br />

Module is not<br />

powered after external<br />

control voltage is<br />

connected.<br />

Upon control voltage<br />

connection the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN Control Module<br />

trips immediately<br />

PWR ON & NO STRT<br />

Trip occurs before<br />

starting.<br />

Local start command<br />

does not cause any<br />

action.<br />

Remote start<br />

command does not<br />

cause any action.<br />

What To Do<br />

• Verify that cabinet MCBs are set to ON position.<br />

• Verify that the Emergency Stop push button is released.<br />

• Verify that customer terminals 5 & 6 are jumpered.<br />

• Verify that the DOL/Soft Start selector switch is set to Soft Start.<br />

• Verify that rated control voltage is connected to customer terminals 1 & 2.<br />

• Verify correct polarity for DC control voltage.<br />

• Disconnecting control voltage from the Control Module and reconnecting the<br />

control voltage does not reset the soft starter if tripped.<br />

• Reset the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN by pressing the Reset key.<br />

• It occurs, when mains voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN more than 30<br />

sec. without a start signal.<br />

• It may occur if mains voltage is connected downstream (“below”) from the<br />

Line Contactor instead of upstream (“above”) the Line Contactor. The starter<br />

protects itself from overheating.<br />

• Can be disabled for special applications.<br />

• Verify that the Local/Remote/Off Selector switch is set to Local and remote<br />

light does not light.<br />

• Verify that the Fault light is not active on the front panel, or on the starter<br />

control panel or on the MPR panel.<br />

• If the Fault light is turned ON:<br />

o Verify that there are no fault messages on <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN & MPR displays.<br />

o Reset if necessary.<br />

o Check setting of the trip relay logic (FAULT/FAULT FAIL-SAFE) of the<br />

soft starter and MPR. Improper setting de-energizes fault relays FT &<br />

FT/1.<br />

• Verify that the Local/Remote/Off Selector switch is set to Remote and the<br />

Remote indication light is on.<br />

• Verify that the Fault indication light is not active on the door and starter &<br />

MPR panels.<br />

• If the trip indication light is turned ON:<br />

o Verify that there are no fault messages on the Starter & MPR displays.<br />

o Reset if necessary.<br />

o Check setting of the trip relay logic (FAULT/FAULT FAIL-SAFE) of the<br />

soft starter and MPR. Improper setting de-energizes fault relays FT &<br />

FT/1.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


120 • Trouble Shooting<br />

Problem<br />

UNDER/NO<br />

VOLTAGE trip occurs<br />

immediately after<br />

starting.<br />

OVER VOLTAGE trip<br />

occurs immediately<br />

after starting.<br />

PHASE SEQUENCE<br />

trip occurs<br />

immediately after<br />

starting.<br />

TOO MANY STARTS<br />

trip occurs<br />

immediately after<br />

starting.<br />

S.SCR OR WR CON.<br />

Trip occurs after<br />

starting.<br />

What To Do<br />

• Verify that all three mains phases are connected.<br />

• At low voltage, testing a missing phase can cause UNDER/NO VOLTAGE<br />

trip.<br />

• Verify that the test harness is connected to the EPT-Tx while testing at low<br />

voltage.<br />

• Verify that the Line Contactor is closed, at least for a short time, at the<br />

beginning of the start process.<br />

• If external line (mains) contactor is used, ensure that its auxiliary contact is<br />

wired back to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet and used (in series with RS relay<br />

contact) to initiate the start command (this contact should not be bridged in<br />

the customer terminals).<br />

• Check UNDERVOLT. TRIP setting level in MAIN & PROTECT page.<br />

• Verify that the Electronic Potential Transformer Receiver (EPT-Rx) fuse<br />

located in the Receiver auxiliary supply plug is OK.<br />

• Verify that the fiber optics wires connecting the EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx are<br />

properly connected.<br />

• Move the external mains connection from upstream of the Line Contactor to<br />

down stream the Line Contactor and turn on the mains voltage . Check<br />

120VAC line to line between EPT-Rx output terminals. Try to start now.<br />

• Take out fibers 11 and 13 from the EPT-Rx, they should emit red light with<br />

the same intensity.<br />

• Check that the 15 pin white connector is properly connected, at the back of<br />

the Control Module.<br />

• Make sure that the mains testing voltage is 400V or as written as on the test<br />

harness.<br />

• If it is higher, disconnect the mains voltage immediately.<br />

• Check OVERVOLT. TRIP setting level in MAIN & PROTECT page.<br />

• Phase sequence of the mains lines is wrong.<br />

• Two options are available:<br />

o Swap two input lines.<br />

o Set PHASE SEQUENCE setting in FAULT PARAMETERS as<br />

required.<br />

• The default setting allows for one start per 20 minutes.<br />

• To reset the fault find the NUMBER OF STARTS setting at the end of the<br />

START PARAMETERS page, increase setting to OFF, then reset. Store at<br />

the end of the page.<br />

• Be sure to set for medium voltage operation after end of testing.<br />

• Verify that the motor’s rated current multiplied by the Gain (as set by the dip<br />

switches) is greater than or equal to 30% of FLC.<br />

• It may occur when the load is not a motor.<br />

• Verify that fiber optic wires 1,3 & 5 are properly connected.<br />

• Verify that Current Gain dip switches are set equally for the three phases and<br />

according to the ratio between starter rated current and testing motor rated<br />

current.<br />

• Try to start using SOFT START CURVE 0, the basic curve. If the motor is not<br />

loaded and has no inertia, the motor may vibrate after reaching full speed.<br />

This is normal and will not occur with the MV motor.<br />

o If the test motor starts properly then the current transformers and their<br />

wiring should be checked.<br />

o If the test motor does not start properly the measured current may be<br />

too low.<br />

• Perform a firing test as described on section 14.3 page 117.<br />

• Check fuses and fuses holders in phases firing power supplies. Refer to<br />

section 10.2.4 page 89.<br />

• Sometimes SOFT START CURVE 0 enables the soft start process, even if a<br />

CT or its wiring is problematic, if mains conditions are not ideal or with nonstandard<br />

motor. Current in every phase must, however be above 5% of<br />

starter FLC, or the same trip might occur.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


121 • Trouble Shooting<br />

Problem<br />

SET CURVE TO 0 trip<br />

occurs after starting.<br />

Motor makes irregular<br />

noise while starting.<br />

O/C-SHEAR PIN trip<br />

occurs immediately<br />

after starting.<br />

PHASE LOSS trip<br />

occurs after starting.<br />

UNBALANCE<br />

CURRENT trip occurs<br />

after starting.<br />

GROUND FAULT trip<br />

occurs after starting.<br />

What To Do<br />

• Check that pairs of Gain dip switches are set identically for the three phases.<br />

• Try SOFT START CURVE 0.<br />

• Verify that the motor is not too small. Try to use a larger motor, with inertia or<br />

loaded, if possible.<br />

• If vibration occurs at the beginning of start process with SOFT START<br />

CURVE 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 try SOFT START CURVE 0.<br />

• If vibrations occurs at the beginning of start process with SOFT START<br />

CURVE 0 check low voltage test harness installation, fiber optic 11 & 13 and<br />

EPT-Rx outputs.<br />

• Vibrations, when approaching full speed at the start of SOFT START CURVE<br />

0 with motors that have no load are normal and do not indicate a problem.<br />

With other SOFT START CURVE it can occur with small / unloaded motor<br />

which accelerates too fast. Try to reduce INITIAL VOLTAGE to a minimum.<br />

• Verify that current Gain dip switches are set according to the ratio between<br />

the rated current of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN and the testing motor rated current .<br />

• If the test motor is loaded or has some inertia, try to start with SOFT START<br />

CURVE 0, the basic curve. If the problem is solved, then test the current<br />

transformers and their wiring. Sometimes the SOFT START CURVE 0<br />

enables a loaded motor to start properly, even if a CT or its wiring are faulty<br />

or with a problematic mains (weak transformer for the low voltage test).<br />

• Check that all fibers are properly connected according to their numbers.<br />

• Verify that Current Gain dip switches are set according to the ratio between<br />

the rated current of the starter and the testing motor rated current.<br />

• The trip can occur if added (by setting of Gain dip switches) gain is too high.<br />

• Try to start with SOFT START CURVE 0 and stop with SOFT STOP CURVE<br />

0. If problem us solved the current transformers and their wiring should be<br />

checked.<br />

• Check that all fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />

• Verify that all three phases are within range.<br />

• Verify that EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />

• If low voltage mains is powered from a generator, check that frequency is<br />

within the range of 46Hz < f


122 • Trouble Shooting<br />

Problem<br />

Motor vibrates<br />

mechanically at the<br />

end of starting<br />

process or at the<br />

beginning of soft stop.<br />

current fluctuates.<br />

OPEN BYPASS trip<br />

occurs after end of<br />

start process.<br />

Current reading as<br />

displayed on starter’s<br />

panel is not correct.<br />

OVERLOAD trip<br />

occurs after Bypass is<br />

closed.<br />

UNDER CURRENT<br />

trip occurs after<br />

Bypass is closed.<br />

MPR does not<br />

respond to current<br />

during low voltage<br />

motor starting.<br />

Motor is started<br />

immediately after<br />

resetting a trip.<br />

What To Do<br />

• This phenomena may occur with unloaded or lightly loaded motor, if SOFT<br />

START CURVE 0 is used.<br />

• Use standard curve SOFT START CURVE 1 and SOFT STOP CURVE 1.<br />

• Verify that Current Gain dip switches are set according to the ratio between<br />

the rated current of the starter and the testing motor rated current.<br />

• Check Bypass Contactor wiring.<br />

• Verify that <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC setting parameter is set according to the rated<br />

current of the starter.<br />

• Current Gain dip switches gain current reading as follows:<br />

o Both Gain dip switches of phases set to on -> gain = 1<br />

o Gain dip switches # 1 of phases set to off -> gain = 5<br />

o Gain dip switches # 2 of phases set to off -> gain = 13.4<br />

o Both Gain dip switches of phases set to off -> gain = 67<br />

• Use a Clamp-on the Ammeter to measure test the motor current.<br />

• Starter’s current reading should be approximately actual current multiplied by<br />

the gain ratio set by the Gain dip switches.<br />

• Set parameters to default parameters and re-program the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

• Verify that current Gain dip switches are set according to the testing motor<br />

rated current versus rated current of the starter. Overload trip can occur if<br />

gain (set by Gain dip switches settings) is too high.<br />

• Verify that the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC setting parameter is set according to the rated<br />

current of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

• Set Motor FLA identically to <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN FLC.<br />

• Reset, start again and read currents on screen.<br />

• Check if current readings after start are is more than starter’s rated current.<br />

• Reduce setting of Undercurrent setting in the MAIN & PROTECT Parameters<br />

settings.<br />

• This is normal. The MPR (Motor Protection Relay) does not have extra gain<br />

for testing. Its current reading may be very low, below the minimum<br />

threshold.<br />

• Might occur when the Local / Remote switch is set to remote, and the remote<br />

contact is closed.<br />

Note: It is the responsibility of the remote controller to open the remote<br />

start/stop contact immediately upon trip.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


123 • Trouble Shooting<br />

14.5 Medium Voltage Trouble shooting<br />

This troubleshooting table is intended for Medium voltage testing, while medium voltage and motor are<br />

connected to the cabinet .It is intended to be used only after low voltage tests are successfully performed.<br />

WARNING!<br />

It is absolutely forbidden to open one or more of the medium voltage doors, even if the<br />

motor is not running and Line Contactor is open.<br />

It is not advised to try troubleshooting the system while connected to the medium<br />

voltage mains. Should any other than operational or minor problem occur, it is<br />

recommended to go back to the low voltage test.<br />

Before starting, recheck rated mains voltage and current, and compare them to <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN rated values.<br />

Note: If the mains network is weak (long lines, small transformers, generator supply),<br />

it is recommended to set SOFT START CURVE 0 and SOFT STOP CURVE 0.<br />

Problem<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control<br />

Module is not powered<br />

after external control<br />

voltage is connected.<br />

Upon control voltage<br />

connection the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN Control Module<br />

trips immediately<br />

PWR ON & NO STRT<br />

Trip occurs before<br />

starting.<br />

Local start command<br />

does not cause any<br />

action.<br />

Remote start<br />

command does not<br />

cause any action.<br />

What To Do<br />

• Verify that the cabinet MCBs are set to the ON position.<br />

• Verify that the Emergency Stop push button is released.<br />

• Verify that customer terminals 5 & 6 are jumpered.<br />

• Verify that the DOL/Soft Start selector switch is set to Soft Start.<br />

• Verify that rated control voltage is connected to customer terminals 1 & 2.<br />

• Verify correct polarity for DC control voltage.<br />

• Disconnecting control voltage from the Control Module and reconnecting the<br />

control voltage do not reset the soft starter if tripped.<br />

• Reset the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN by pressing the Reset key.<br />

• It occurs, when mains voltage is connected to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN more than 30<br />

sec. without a start signal.<br />

• Normal control logic is such that the start command first closes the Line<br />

Contactor and apply medium voltage to the L1, L2, L3 bus bars of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN IP00 unit.<br />

• When the Line Contactor is located outside the cabinet, make sure that its<br />

auxiliary contact is wired to apply control input voltage to terminals 5 & 6 of<br />

the Control Module via the customer terminals. The auxiliary contact of the<br />

Line Contactor must be connected in a series to a contact of the RS relay.<br />

• Verify that the Local/Remote/Off Selector switch is set to Local and remote<br />

light does not lit.<br />

• Verify that the Fault light is not active on the front panel, on the starter control<br />

panel or on the MPR panel.<br />

• If the Fault light is turned ON:<br />

o Verify that there are no fault messages on <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN & MPR displays.<br />

o Reset if necessary.<br />

o Check the settings of the trip relay logic (FAULT/FAULT FAIL-SAFE)<br />

of the soft starter and MPR. Improper settings de-energizes fault<br />

relays FT & FT/1.<br />

• Verify that the Local/Remote/Off Selector switch is set to Remote and the<br />

Remote indication light is on.<br />

• Verify that Fault indication light is not active on the door, starter and MPR<br />

panels.<br />

• If the trip indication light is turned ON:<br />

o Verify that there are no fault messages on Starter & MPR displays.<br />

o Reset if necessary.<br />

• Check setting of the trip relay logic (FAULT/FAULT FAIL-SAFE) of the soft<br />

starter and MPR. Improper setting de-energizes fault relays FT & FT/1.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


124 • Trouble Shooting<br />

Problem<br />

UNDER/NO<br />

VOLTAGE trip occurs<br />

immediately after<br />

starting.<br />

OVER VOLTAGE trip<br />

occurs immediately<br />

after starting.<br />

PHASE SEQUENCE<br />

trip occurs<br />

immediately after<br />

starting.<br />

TOO MANY STARTS<br />

trip occurs<br />

immediately after<br />

starting.<br />

S.SCR OR WR CON.<br />

Trip occurs after<br />

starting.<br />

SET CURVE TO 0<br />

trip occurs after<br />

starting.<br />

Motor makes irregular<br />

noise while starting.<br />

O/C-SHEAR PIN trip<br />

occurs immediately<br />

after starting.<br />

What To Do<br />

• Verify that the Mains voltage is connected (no open Isolator, etc.).<br />

• Verify by listening, that the Line Contactor is closed at start, at least for a<br />

short period of time (until the Trip command opens it).<br />

• If an external Line Contactor is used, ensure that its auxiliary contact is wired<br />

back to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN cabinet and used (in series with RS relay) to apply the<br />

start command in terminals 5 & 6 in the Control Module (this contact should<br />

not be bridged in the customer terminals.<br />

• Check UNDERVOLT TRIP setting level in the MAIN & PROTECT setting<br />

page.<br />

• Verify that the fuse located in the EPT-Rx connector did not melt. Refer to<br />

section 10.2.4 page 89.<br />

• Check that the 15 pin white connector is properly connected, at the back of<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Control Module<br />

• Disconnect and secure the mains source.<br />

• Check EPT-Tx to EPT-Rx fiber optic connections.<br />

• If required perform a second low voltage test .<br />

• Verify that <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN rated voltage is identical to mains voltage.<br />

• Check OVERVOLT TRIP setting level in MAIN & PROTECT page.<br />

• If the unit is powered from the generator, check its output voltage.<br />

• Phase sequence of the mains lines is wrong.<br />

• Two options are available:<br />

o Swap two input lines.<br />

o Set PHASE SEQUENCE setting in FAULT PARAMETERS as<br />

required.<br />

• Check and verify correct settings of the following parameters in the START<br />

PARAMETRS page: NUMBER OF STARTS, STARTS PERIOD and START<br />

INHIBIT. Refer to section 7.8.3 page 60.<br />

• Warning: Wait at least the required time between starts to prevent damage,<br />

both to the starter and motor !<br />

• Verify that the Current Gain dip switches are set to ON.<br />

• Disconnect medium voltage and verify that motor and mains input are<br />

properly connected.<br />

• Check that all fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />

• Set SOFT START CURVE 0 and try to start.<br />

o If the problem is solved and the start process is OK, leave it on SOFT<br />

START CURVE 0. Set SOFT STOP CURVE 0 as well.<br />

o If the problem is not solved then the measured current in one or more<br />

phases may be too low.<br />

• Another reason can be nonstandard motor parameters.<br />

• SOFT STOP CURVE 0 may enable it to function properly, even if the mains<br />

conditions are not ideal or with non-standard motor. Current in every phase<br />

must however be above 10% of starter FLC, or the same trip may occur.<br />

• Mains and system conditions are not optimal for other than SOFT START 0<br />

and SOFT STOP CURVE 0. Set both parameters in START PARAMETERS<br />

page and in STOP PARAMETERS page.<br />

• Try to start the motor again.<br />

• Check that all fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />

• Try to start with SOFT START CURVE 0.<br />

• If the problem is resolved, check the current transformers and their wiring.<br />

• SOFT START CURVE 0 may enable it to function properly even if a CT or its<br />

wiring are faulty.<br />

• Verify that current Gain dip switches are set to on and not left in the<br />

high gain off position, used for the low voltage test.<br />

• Try to start and stop with SOFT START 0 and SOFT STOP CURVE 0.<br />

• If the problem is solved, check the current transformers and their<br />

wiring.<br />

• Check that all fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


125 • Trouble Shooting<br />

Problem<br />

PHASE LOSS trip<br />

occurs after starting.<br />

UNBALANCE<br />

CURRENT trip occurs<br />

after starting.<br />

GROUND FAULT trip<br />

occurs after starting.<br />

Motor vibrates<br />

mechanically at the<br />

end of starting<br />

process or at the<br />

beginning of soft stop.<br />

current fluctuates.<br />

OPEN BYPASS trip<br />

occurs after end of<br />

start process.<br />

Current reading as<br />

displayed on starter’s<br />

panel is not correct.<br />

OVERLOAD trip<br />

occurs after Bypass is<br />

closed.<br />

UNDER CURRENT<br />

trip occurs after<br />

Bypass is closed.<br />

Motor is started<br />

immediately after<br />

resetting a trip.<br />

What To Do<br />

• Verify that all three phases are within range.<br />

• Verify that EPT-Tx and EPT-Rx fiber optic wires are properly connected.<br />

• If low voltage mains is powered from a generator, check that the frequency is<br />

within the range of 46Hz < f


126 • Spare Parts<br />

15. SPARE PARTS<br />

When ordering spare parts for <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN specify the model and the serial number of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN as shown<br />

on its label and/or on its documentation.<br />

Recommended spare parts list for a soft starter:<br />

All spare parts are for:<br />

Model: <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN____ ______ _____ _____ ________<br />

Serial number:____________________<br />

Description<br />

Cat. Number<br />

(to be filled by the factory)<br />

Quantity in<br />

standard<br />

soft starter<br />

Recommended<br />

quantity as<br />

spare parts<br />

Complete stack (phase<br />

assembly)<br />

3 1<br />

Firing PCB 3 1<br />

Power supply for firing PCB 3 1<br />

EPT-Rx TRAF540964 (identical for all models) 1 1<br />

EPT-Tx 1 1<br />

Current transformer …/2 3 3<br />

Control module.<br />

Order with all options<br />

installed)<br />

Firing transformer<br />

Or<br />

DC power supply<br />

Fiber optic wires<br />

Set of support rods for<br />

disassembling phase module<br />

for <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN up to 6.6kV<br />

Low voltage components<br />

spare parts. (terminal blocks,<br />

indication lights, fuses, etc…)<br />

Line and Bypass<br />

Contactors/VCBs<br />

1 1<br />

1 1<br />

10m<br />

TOOL00002 - 1<br />

1<br />

2 1<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


127 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

16. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN COMMUNICATION (MODBUS PROTOCOL)<br />

16.1 Introduction<br />

This document summarizes the Modbus serial link protocol to / from the Digital Soft Starter (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN). The<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN can be equipped with many other serial link protocols.<br />

Features:<br />

* RS485 Hardware.<br />

* Asynchronous serial link.<br />

* Half duplex.<br />

* Format: Modbus RTU Mode (Remote Terminal Unit Mode).<br />

- Binary,<br />

- Each character contains 11 bits:<br />

- 1 start bit<br />

- 8 data bits, least significant bit sent first.<br />

- 1 Parity bit. Even / Odd / No can be selected.<br />

- 1 Stop bit if Parity is used, 2 stop bits if Parity is not used.<br />

- Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC), 16 bits.<br />

* Baud Rates: 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 bits per second.<br />

* Response time of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN:<br />

- Normally, 4ms


128 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

16.2 Basic Structure of the Serial Link Frame<br />

The Modbus RTU frame has the same principal structure for both the "Query" transmission from the Master to<br />

the Slave (<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN) and the Response transmission from the Slave to the Master:<br />

"sync": Silent Interval for at least 3.5 character times 1<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. (= Slave Address) (1..247)<br />

byte 2: Function (1,2,3,4,5,6,8,15 &16 are supported)<br />

byte 3: Data Bytes ($XX)<br />

. . ($XX)<br />

. . ($XX)<br />

byte n-1: CRC_Low<br />

($XX)<br />

byte n : CRC_High<br />

($XX)<br />

"sync": Silent Interval for at least 3.5 characters<br />

16.3 SYNC (Silent Interval)<br />

In RTU mode, messages use a "Silent Interval" more than 3.5 characters to "synchronize". This silent interval<br />

separates transmission frames.<br />

The entire frame must be transmitted as a continuous stream. A silent interval of more than 3.5 characters<br />

during frame transmission will cause the receiving device to ignore the incomplete frame. The next byte is<br />

assumed to be the Serial Link No. of the next frame.<br />

Ignoring the frame can also occur if a second message is transmitted less than 3.5 characters from the end of<br />

the previous frame. This causes the receiving device to consider that frame to be a continuation of the first<br />

frame, thus resulting in a CRC error.<br />

16.4 Serial Link No. (Slave Address)<br />

Contains <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Slave Number (1..247) on the serial link. The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN default value is 248, which is the<br />

communication OFF condition. Serial Link No. is used as the first byte in both the "Query" transmission from<br />

Master to Slave and in Response transmission from Slave to Master.<br />

Note: Address 0, which is normally used for broadcast transmissions is not supported by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

16.5 Function<br />

The Function code informs the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN what action is requested. In most cases, Function is used as the<br />

second byte in both the "Query" transmission from Master to Slave and in Response transmission from Slave<br />

to Master.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


129 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

16.6 List of Functions Supported By The <strong>HRVS</strong>DN<br />

Function Modbus Name<br />

Use in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

01 Read Coil Status Read discrete commands status.<br />

02 Read Input Status Read discrete inputs status.<br />

03 Read Holding Registers. Read parameter settings.<br />

Read actual data (for Modbus Plus users).<br />

04 Read Input Registers. Read actual data.<br />

05 Force Single Coil. Force one discrete command.<br />

06 Preset Single Register. Write one parameter setting.<br />

08 Diagnostics. Loopback diagnostics.<br />

15 Force Multiple Coils. Force discrete commands.<br />

16 Force Multiple Registers Write parameter setting<br />

control commands<br />

DATA<br />

Data field includes information transferred to and from the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. The specific data format is changed with<br />

Function. When Word data parameters are transmitted, High Byte is transmitted first, followed by the Low<br />

Byte.<br />

CRC<br />

The CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) two bytes (16 bit) are used to check the bytes of the entire frame.<br />

It is generated in the master device and transmitted as the last two bytes of the frame (Low byte is appended<br />

first, followed by the High byte). The slave device regenerates the CRC bytes and compares it to the CRC<br />

bytes received. If the CRC bytes are not identical, the frame is flushed and no response is transmitted to the<br />

master.<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN MEMORY ORGANIZATION<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN memory is organized according to the common Modbus addresses as follows:<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


130 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Use<br />

Memory Type Max Query/Response Parameters<br />

Actual Data 3X References Registers, # 1..150, addressed 0.. 149.<br />

4X References Registers, #257...384 addr. 256..283<br />

Parameter Settings 4X References Registers, # 1..110, addressed 0..109<br />

Hardwired Control Inputs 1X References Inputs, # 1..16, addressed 0..15.<br />

Discrete Serial Commands 0X References Coils, # 1..16, addressed 0..15.<br />

Control Commands 4X ReferencesRegister, # 753, addressed 752.<br />

Notes:<br />

1. Actual Data parameters can be read both at 3X references starting at parameter #1, or (same parameters)<br />

at 4X references starting at parameter #257 (100 hex higher). The additional mapping in 4X references is<br />

designed for the convenience of Modbus Plus users.<br />

2. <strong>HRVS</strong>_DN can be controlled using the standard discrete commands (Coils, 0x references) or by writing to<br />

parameter setting #753 with function 16. The additional control option using 4X references is designed for<br />

the convenience of Modbus Plus users. To control, write to register #753 (address 752) only! (one register<br />

write, with function 16).<br />

3. Function 3 should be used to read 4X references. Function 4, to read 3x references.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


131 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

16.7 Actual Data (3X References & 4X references)<br />

Actual data includes measured values such as voltage, current and insulation resistance. It includes both<br />

logic and statistical information. All parameters are word (two bytes) parameters. The protocol supports only<br />

reading of these parameters.<br />

Parameter # is "1 based". The actual parameter address is 1 lower than parameter #. For example the<br />

address of parameter #1 is 0 (30000).<br />

The parameters have double mapping, at the following 3x & 4x references:<br />

Note: Function 4 should be used to read 3x references and function 3 to read 4x references.<br />

Parameter # (3x) # (4x) Comment<br />

Logic Status 1 257 Logic status of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. 1 indicates:<br />

d15: <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Trip.<br />

d14: Motor Stopped.<br />

d13: Motor in Soft Stop Process.<br />

d12: Motor in Start Process.<br />

d11: Motor is Running.<br />

d10: Motor is running with Closed By_Pass.<br />

d9: Up_To_Speed. Like d10 and I reduced (once) below<br />

115% of FLA.<br />

d8: Reserved.<br />

d7: Dual_Adjust On.<br />

d6..d0: Reserved.<br />

Note: After bypass is closed, trip (d15) and running (d11),<br />

can be ON together. See Trip_after_By-Pass setting<br />

parameter at fault parameters page.<br />

Hardwired inputs 2 258 Discrete Hardwired control inputs:<br />

d15..d8: Reserved.<br />

d7: External fault 2, Terminal 20.<br />

d6: External Fault 1,Terminal 19.<br />

d5: Reserved.<br />

d4:Programmable Input , Terminal 8<br />

Programming options:<br />

0-D.Adj / 1- Slow.Speed / 2-Reset<br />

d3: Programmable Input, Terminal 7<br />

Programming options:<br />

0-Test1 / 1-Reverse / 2-Reset<br />

d2: Start Input. Terminal 6<br />

d1: Soft Stop Input. Terminal 5<br />

d0: Stop Input. Terminal 4<br />

Relays 3 259 d0 - Immediate,d1- End Of Acc, d2 - Fault relay<br />

Voltage 4 260 Line voltage, % of rated voltage.<br />

I1_amp 5 261 Current of phase 1, Ampere.<br />

I2_amp 6 262 Current of phase 2, Ampere.<br />

I3_amp 7 263 Current of phase 3, Ampere.<br />

Reserved 8 264<br />

Dip_Switch 9 265 d15..d8: Reserved.<br />

d7: Setting Lock - (right-most)<br />

d6: Enlarged Setting Ranges<br />

d5: Language Selection.<br />

d4: Language Selection.<br />

d3: Reserved - Must be set to Off.<br />

d2: Generator Starting - Set to Off.<br />

d1: Tacho feedback available (1).<br />

d0: Min (off) / Max display pages- (left most)<br />

Phase_Sequence 10 266 1: Correct Phase seq. 0 : Wrong Phase Seq.<br />

Motor Insulation R 11 267 Motor Insulation Resistance [KOhm]<br />

Reserved 12..14 268..270<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


132 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

Power 15 Power consumption [KW]<br />

Parameter # (3x) # (4x) Comment<br />

Reactive Power 16 Reactive Power consumption [KVAR]<br />

Power Factor 17 Power Factor * 100<br />

Time Since Last Start 18 Elapsed minutes since last start<br />

Frequency 19 Frequency [tenth Hz]<br />

Reserved 20..24<br />

Logic_Status_at_Power_Fail 25 281 Logic Status at Control Pwr Supply turn off.<br />

(See parameter # 1 for detailed description)<br />

Total_Run_Time 26 282 Total Hours of Running Motor.<br />

Total_Starts 27 283 Total Number Of Starts<br />

Last_Start_Period 28 284 Duration of Last Start, Seconds.<br />

Last_Start_Peak_I 29 285 Peak Current During Last Starting process<br />

Time_To_Start 30 286 After Too Many Starts Trip, Seconds.<br />

Total_Trips 31 287 Total Number Of Trips<br />

Last_Trip_Number 32 288 Number of the fault that caused trip.<br />

No. Fault<br />

01 Over Temperature<br />

02 Overcurrent / Shear pin<br />

03 Overload<br />

04 Under Current<br />

05 Under / No Voltage<br />

06 Over Voltage<br />

07 Phase Loss<br />

08 Phase Sequence<br />

09 Wrong Connection or Shorted Scr<br />

10 Long Start Time<br />

11 Slow Speed Time (Future feature)<br />

12 External Fault 1 (Input # 3)<br />

13 External Fault 2 (Input # 4)<br />

14 Wrong Parameters<br />

15 Mains ON & No Start Signal<br />

16 Too Many Starts<br />

17 Currents Unbalance<br />

18 Thermistor (Future feature)<br />

19 Ground Fault<br />

20 Open By-Pass<br />

21 Frequency out of range<br />

Pre_Trip_I 33 289 Current at trip time, % of FLA.<br />

Reserved 34..38 290..294<br />

Thermal Capacity 39 295 Simulated winding temperature, %. 100% = trip<br />

Reserved 40 296<br />

Clk_Hour 41 297 Setting can be done at # 131<br />

Clk_Minute 42 298 Setting can be done at # 132<br />

Clk_Month 43 299 Setting can be done at # 133<br />

Clk_Date 44 300 Setting can be done at # 134<br />

Clk_Year 45 301 Setting can be done at # 135<br />

Reserved 46 302<br />

KWH 47,48 303,304 dword parameter (47=LSword,48=MSword)<br />

KVARH 49,50 305,306 dword parameter (49=LSword,50=MSword)<br />

Reserved 51..56 307..312<br />

Trip_Array(10) 57..66 313..322 List of last 10 Trip<br />

(See fault list starting at parameter # 24)<br />

Trip_Hour_Array(10) 67..76 323..332 List of time (Hour) of the last 10 trips<br />

Trip_Minute_Array(10) 77..86 333..342 List of time (Minute) of the last 10 trips<br />

Trip_Date_Array(10) 87..96 343..352 List of date (Date) of the last 10 trips<br />

Trip_Month_Array(10) 97..106 353..362 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

Trip_Year_Array(10) 107..116 363..372 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

Trip_Pointer 117 373 Pointer for the 10 cyclic above arrays<br />

Actual_Data_Group 151..170 407..426 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by<br />

setting parameters #90..109<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


133 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

Example 1:<br />

To read actual parameters 5,6,7 (I1,I2,I3 Actual Parameters, Addressed as 4.5 and 6) of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 18 (its<br />

Serial Link No. = 18) , the host computer should send following frame:<br />

Another Possibility<br />

(Modbus Plus users)<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($12) ($12)<br />

byte 2: Function ($04) ($03)<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($00) ($01)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($04) ($04)<br />

byte 5: No. of Points High ($00) ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of Points Low ($03) ($03)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX) ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX) ($XX)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN response, when Current = 400 % of FLA, and Voltage = 420V, is:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($12) ($12)<br />

byte 2: Function ($04) ($03)<br />

byte 3: Byte Count ($06) ($06)<br />

byte 4: Data High, parameter 5 ($01) (400) ($01)<br />

byte 5: Data Low, parameter 5 ($90) ($90)<br />

byte 6: Data High, parameter 6 ($01) (420) ($01)<br />

byte 7: Data Low, parameter 6 ($A4) ($A4)<br />

byte 8: Data High, parameter 7 ($01) (410) ($01)<br />

byte 9: Data Low, parameter 7 ($9A) ($9A)<br />

byte 10: CRC_Low ($XX) ($XX)<br />

byte 11: CRC_High ($XX) ($XX)<br />

Note: $XX indicates Hexadecimal byte.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


134 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

16.8 Parameter Settings (4X References)<br />

Parameter settings include all parameters that can be set <strong>manual</strong>ly. These parameters determine the modes<br />

of operation of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. They also set protections level. All parameters are word (two bytes)<br />

parameters. The protocol supports both reading and modifying of (most of) these parameters.<br />

Note: Use function 3 to read the setting parameters.<br />

Any one of these parameters must be set with care. Inappropriate settings of some parameters can<br />

result in damage to both the motor and the <strong>HRVS</strong>DN.<br />

The parameters have the following 4x references:<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Main & protect. parameters<br />

Rated Line Voltage 1 6600..15000 6600 (Volt.)<br />

Starter FLC 2 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />

Motor FLA 3 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />

Rated Motor Power 4 50..40000 1000 (KW)<br />

Service Factor 5 100..130% 100 (%)<br />

Undercurrent Trip 6 0..90 0 (% of FLA)<br />

Undercurrent Delay 7 1..40 10 (Seconds)<br />

Overcurrent Shear Pin 8 100..850 850 (% of FLA)<br />

Overcurrent Delay 9 0..50 5 (0.5 Sec.)<br />

Overload Class 10 IEC 5,10,15,20,25,30 IEC Class 10<br />

NEMA 5,10,15,20,25,30 FLA)<br />

Overload Protect 11 0=Disable 1=Enable While Run<br />

1=Enable While Run<br />

2=Enable<br />

Unbalance Trip 12 10..100, 101 = Off. 20 (%)<br />

Unbalance Delay 13 1..60 5 (Seconds)<br />

Ground Fault Trip 14 10..100, 101 = Off. 20 (% of FLA)<br />

Ground Fault Delay 15 1..60 5 (Seconds)<br />

Undervoltage Trip 16 50..90 70 (%)<br />

Undervoltage Delay 17 1..100 5 (Seconds)<br />

Overvoltage Trip 18 110..125, 126 (=off) 120 (%)<br />

Overvoltage Delay 19 1..10 2 (Seconds)<br />

Reserved 20..24<br />

Start Parameters<br />

Soft Start Curve 25 0..11 (6..11 are for Tacho only) 1 (Standard).<br />

Pulse Level 26 70 (%of FLA) – 700 (%of FLA) 70% of FLA<br />

Pulse Time 27 0..10 (Tenth Seconds) 0 (No Pulse)<br />

Initial Voltage 28 10..80 30 (% of full voltage)<br />

Initial Current 28 ! 100..400 % of FLA 100 % of FLA<br />

Current Limit 29 100..700 400 (% of FLA)<br />

Acceleration Time 30 1..90 10 (Seconds)<br />

Max. Start Time 31 1..250 30 (Seconds)<br />

Number Of Starts 32 1..10 & (11 = off) 1<br />

Starts Period 33 1..60 20 (Minutes)<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


135 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Start Inhibit 34 1..60 minutes 15 (Minutes)<br />

Run Contact Delay 35 0..120 minutes 5 (Seconds)<br />

Turn Bypass On at 35 121..250 % of Motor FLA Only with relay PCB for<br />

optional sync motor start<br />

Min Time To Bypass 36 3..60 3sec.<br />

Only with relay PCB for<br />

optional sync motor start<br />

Reserved 37..40<br />

Stop Parameters<br />

Soft Stop Curve 41 0..11 (6..11 are for Tacho only) 1 (Standard)<br />

Deceleration Time 42 0..90 0 (Seconds)<br />

Final Torque 43 0..10 0 (Minimum)<br />

Reserved 44..48<br />

Dual Adjustment Parameters<br />

DA: Initial Voltage 49 10..80 % of full voltage 30<br />

DA: Initial Current 49 ! 100..400 % of FLA 100 % of FLA<br />

DA: Current Limit 50 100..700 400 % of FLA<br />

DA: Acceleration Time 51 1..90 10 (Seconds)<br />

DA: Deceleration Time 52 0..90 0 (Seconds)<br />

DA: Motor_FLA 53 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />

Reserved 54..56<br />

Fault Parameters<br />

UV & PL Auto Reset 57 0 / 1 (0 - No, 1 - Yes) 0 (No)<br />

Under Current Reset 58 10..120 (&121-off) 121 (Off)<br />

ByPass Open Trip 59 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />

Trip after Bypass 60 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />

By-Pass Auto Reset 61 0 – No, 1 – Yes 0 - No<br />

Set Curve 0 Flt 62 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />

Power On & No Start 63 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />

Insulation Alarm 64 1(Off) – 100 (10Mohm) 1 (Off)<br />

Insulation Trip 65 1(Off) – 100 (10Mohm) 1 (Off)<br />

Phase Sequence 66 0 – Pos., 1 – Neg., 2 – Ignore 0 (Positive)<br />

Reserved 67..72<br />

I/O Programming<br />

Prog. Input # 7 (terminal 7) 73 0 ..3 (0-Test,1-Resst) 1 (Reset)<br />

0 - Test<br />

1 - Reset<br />

2 - Multi Soft Stop– consult the factory.<br />

3 - Current Control– consult the factory.<br />

Prog. Input # 8 (terminal 8) 74 0 / 1 (0-D.Adj.,1-Rseet) 0 (Dual Adjust)<br />

Fault Relay Type 75 0..1 (0-Fault, 1-Fault Fail Safe) 0 (Fault)<br />

Immediate Relay Type 76 0..1 (0-Immediate, 1-shear pin) 0 (Immediate)<br />

Realy On Delay 77 0..3600 0 (Seconds)<br />

Realy Off Delay 78 0..3600 0 (Seconds)<br />

Analog output 79 0..1 (0 - Normal, 1 - Inverted) 0 (Normal)<br />

Reserved 80<br />

Communication Parameters<br />

Comm. Protocol 81 0 – Modbus, 1 – Profibus 0 – Modbus<br />

Modbus Baud Rate 82 12..192 (*100) 192 (19200 bps)<br />

Parity Check 83 0/1/2 (Even / Odd / No) 0 (Even)<br />

Serial Link Number 84 1..247 & (248= Off) 248 (Off)<br />

S. Link Parameters Save 85 0 – Disable, 1 – Enable 0 (Disable saving)<br />

Serial Link Control 86 0 – Disable, 1 – Enable 0 (Disable Control)<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


136 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

Front Comm. Address 87 1..247 & (248= Off) 248 (Off)<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Reserved 88,89<br />

Modbus_#_Array 90..109 1..60 (# of parameter) (default # are:<br />

1-Logic_Status, 5 - I1, 6-I2, 7 - I3, 4 - V, 2 - Ctrl-In, 3- Ctrl_Out<br />

(relays), 15-Power,17-Power Factor, 8 - frequency,<br />

10 - Phase Sequence, 26-Total Run Time,<br />

27 - Total Starts, 31 - Total Trips, 28 - Last Start Period,<br />

29 - Last Start Peak I, 32-Last Trip Number, 33-Pre Trip I,<br />

39-Thermal Capacity, 11 – Insulation Resistance<br />

Notes:<br />

1. Parameter # is "1 based". The address is 1 lower than parameter #. For example address of parameter #1<br />

is 0 (40000).<br />

2. When the Preset Single Register Function (06) is used to adjust one parameter setting, the<br />

communication program checks that the parameter value is within the allowed limits. If not, an Exception<br />

Response (Exception code 03) is returned instead of Normal response. See Exception Responses later in<br />

this document.<br />

3. If Preset Multiple Register Function (16) is used to adjust one or multiple parameter settings, then even if<br />

one or more parameter settings are out of range, Normal response will be returned.<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN program will check later the value of each parameter. If it is beyond the allowed limit, the limit<br />

value will be stored instead of the transmitted parameter value.<br />

4. It is strongly recommended to preset parameter settings only when the motor is stopped. The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

enables, however to preset one parameter (using function 06 only) when the motor is running with closed<br />

Bypass Contactor. When motor is Soft Started, Soft Stopped, runs with open bypass or at slow speed, the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN ignores "Preset Single Register" or "Force Multiple Register" instructions. A "busy" Exception<br />

response is returned by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN whenever its logic condition does not enable presetting.<br />

5. Always wait more than 0.5Sec after using Functions 06 or 16 to preset parameter(s) before transmitting<br />

again to the same <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

6. Communication parameters 81, 82, 83 can only be read through the serial link. They can only be set<br />

(written) <strong>manual</strong>ly.<br />

7. It is the user’s responsibility to read and check all changed parameter settings after presetting.<br />

8. It is not possible to write data to the setting parameters when dip switch 8 (pc2000) is set.<br />

Example 2:<br />

To Read Stop Parameter settings 41-43 addressed as 40-42 (Soft Stop Curve, Deceleration Time and Final<br />

Torque) of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 96. The host computer sends the following frame:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($60)<br />

byte 2: Function ($03)<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($00) (40)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($28)<br />

byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($03)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN normal response:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($60)<br />

byte 2: Function ($03)<br />

byte 3: Byte Count ($06)<br />

byte 4: Data High ($00) (Soft Stop Curve = 0)<br />

byte 5: Data Low ($00)<br />

byte 6: Data High ($00) (Deceleration Time = 10Sec)<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


yte 7: Data Low ($10)<br />

byte 8: Data High ($00) (Final Torque = 0)<br />

byte 9: Data Low ($00)<br />

byte 10: CRC_Low<br />

($XX)<br />

byte 11: CRC_High<br />

($XX)<br />

137 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

Example 3 :<br />

To write one setting parameter (Under_Voltage_Trip = 300V) to Parameter Setting # 16 (Addressed as 15) of<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 5, the host computer should send following frame:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($05)<br />

byte 2: Function ($06)<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($0F) (15)<br />

byte 5: Preset Data High ($01) (300)<br />

byte 6: Preset Data Low ($2C)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN normal response, is an echo of the query (Identical frame).<br />

Example 4 :<br />

To write multiple parameter settings (Undervoltage__Trip = 300V, Under_Voltage_delay = 10Sec,<br />

Over_Voltage_Trip = 480V, Over_Voltage_delay = 2Sec) to Parameter settings # 16-19 (Addressed as 15-18)<br />

of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 128, the host computer sends the following frame:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($80)<br />

byte 2: Function ($10)<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($0F)<br />

byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($04)<br />

byte 7: Byte Count ($08)<br />

byte 8: Data High ($01) (300)<br />

byte 9: Data Low ($2C)<br />

byte 10: Data High ($00) (10)<br />

byte 11: Data Low ($10)<br />

byte 12: Data High ($01) (480)<br />

byte 13: Data Low<br />

($E0)<br />

byte 14: Data High ($00) (2)<br />

byte 15: Data Low ($02)<br />

byte 16: CRC_Low<br />

($XX)<br />

byte 17: CRC_High<br />

($XX)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN normal response:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($80)<br />

byte 2: Function ($10)<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($0F)<br />

byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($04)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

Note:<br />

A Normal response will be returned even if the preset data value is beyond the allowed range for one or more<br />

parameter settings. Later the <strong>HRVS</strong>DN program will check the value of each parameter. If it exceeds the<br />

allowed limit, the limit value will be stored instead the transmitted parameter value. It is the user’s<br />

responsibility to read and check all parameter settings after presetting.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


138 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

16.9 Control Register Write (4X Reference)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates one Control register intended for controlling the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

Address: The Control register is register # 753 addressed as 752 (40752).<br />

In order to control the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN using the Control register:<br />

* Use Function 16 only.<br />

* Use Address_High (page) = 2<br />

* Use Address_Low = 240 (0F0H).<br />

* Write to one register only.<br />

* Use data_high (ms-byte of data) = 5AH.<br />

* Data_low Bits resolution of the control register (ls-byte of data):<br />

bit function Comment Note<br />

d0 Reserved.<br />

d1 Reserved.<br />

d2 Reserved.<br />

d3 Start/Stop Relay Write "1" (ON) to Start / Run. Operates relay (terminals 31-32)<br />

Write "0" (OFF) to Stop. Located in the Control Module<br />

optional Relay Card.<br />

d4 Dual Adjust Write "1" (ON) to turn On.<br />

Write "0" (OFF) to turn Off.<br />

d5 Reserved.<br />

d6 Reserved.<br />

d7 Reset Write "1" (ON) to Reset.<br />

Notes:<br />

1. Read function of the control register is not available. To read the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN status, read Logic<br />

Status (Actual parameter # 1).<br />

2. Bytes 2..8 of the control frame must be exactly as in the following example. Otherwise, an error<br />

message is returned.<br />

3. Hardwired Stop and Soft Stop inputs, overrides the communication. To enable motor starting<br />

through communication, terminal 4 (Stop) must be connected to the control voltage. Connect<br />

terminals 5 & 6 to control voltage through the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Start/Stop optional relay output<br />

contact.<br />

4. Start/Stop and Dual Adj bits, should be of maintained type, like a toggle switch.<br />

5. Reset bit should be of momentary type, like a momentary reset pushbutton. It is rejected, if<br />

given together with Start command.<br />

6. Before (or simultaneously with) resetting, be sure to turn off start/stop relay bit first.<br />

7. It is the host responsibility, to immediately write a Stop command (writing 5A00 Hex) when<br />

detecting that the Trip bit is set in the Logic Status parameter (parameter # 1 on the In data).<br />

This is to prevent unwanted start command upon resetting the fault.<br />

Example 5 - Control Register Write:<br />

To start <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 11, the host computer sends the following Query frame:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0B)<br />

byte 2: Function ($10) Bytes 2..8 must be as in this example!!!<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($02)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($F0)<br />

byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($01)<br />

byte 7: Byte Count ($02)<br />

byte 8: Data High ($5A)<br />

byte 9: Data Low ($08) Bit 3 is set, to start.<br />

byte 10: CRC_Low<br />

($XX)<br />

byte 11: CRC_High<br />

($XX)<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


139 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN normal response:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0B)<br />

byte 2: Function ($10)<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($02)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($F0)<br />

byte 5: No. of Registers High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of Registers Low ($01)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

16.10 Discrete Commands (Coils, 0x References)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates 16 "Coils", (bit parameters), from which only 3 are operative. The other 13 are<br />

reserved and were incorporated to enable the user to use word (16 bits) type parameters. Coil # is 1"1<br />

based". The actual address is 1 lower than coil #. For example coil #1 is addressed as 0 (00000). Use<br />

functions 5 or 15 to send control commands to the starter.<br />

The coils have the following 0x references:<br />

Coil # Coil Address Use in <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Comment<br />

1 0 Reserved.<br />

2 1 Reserved.<br />

3 2 Reserved.<br />

4 3 Start/Stop Relay Write "1" (ON) to Start / Run.<br />

Write "0" (OFF) to Stop.<br />

5 4 Dual Adjust Write "1" (ON) to turn On.<br />

Write "0" (OFF) to turn Off.<br />

6 5 Reserved.<br />

7 6 Reserved.<br />

8 7 Reset Write "1" (ON) momentarily to Reset.<br />

Rejected, if given together with Start command.<br />

9..16 8..15 Reserved<br />

Example 6 - Read Coils:<br />

To read coils 1..8 status of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 10, the host computer sends the following Query frame:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0A)<br />

byte 2: Function ($01)<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($00)<br />

byte 5: No. of Coils High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of Coils Low ($08)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN response, when coils 7..0 are OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0A)<br />

byte 2: Function ($01)<br />

byte 3: Byte Count ($01)<br />

byte 4: Data (coils 7..0) ($14)<br />

byte 5: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 6: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

Example 7 - Force Single Coil:<br />

To start the motor controlled by <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 1, the host computer writes "1" to the "START/STOP COIL" (coil<br />

4 addressed as 3) .<br />

Note: For Force Single Coil Function, Force Data of $0000 forces "0" = OFF. Force data of $FF00 forces "1"<br />

= ON. The "Query" frame is sent by the host:<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


140 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($01)<br />

byte 2: Function ($05)<br />

byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Coils address Low ($03) Start/Stop relay<br />

byte 5: Force Data High ($FF) (force ON)<br />

byte 6: Force Data Low ($00)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

The normal (if no exception) response:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($01)<br />

byte 2: Function ($05)<br />

byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Coils address Low ($03)<br />

byte 5: Force Data High ($FF)<br />

byte 6: Force Data Low ($00)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

Notes:<br />

1. Hardwired Stop and Soft Stop inputs, overrides the communication. To enable motor starting through<br />

communication, terminal 4 (Stop) must be connected to the control voltage. Connect Terminals 5 & 6<br />

to control voltage through the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Start/Stop optional relay output contact.<br />

2. Start/Stop coil and Dual Adj coil should be of maintained type, like a toggle switch.<br />

3. Reset coil should be of momentary type, like a momentary reset pushbutton. It is Rejected, if given<br />

together with Start command.<br />

4. Before reseting, be sure to turn off start/stop relay coil first.<br />

5. It is the host responsibility, to immediately write a Stop command when detecting that the Trip bit is set<br />

in the Logic_Status parameter (parameter # 1 in the Actual data). This is to prevent unwanted start<br />

command upon resetting the fault.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


141 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

Example 8 - Force Multiple coils:<br />

Motor that is controlled by <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 32 is stopped. Dual Adjust is set to off.<br />

To start the motor using the Dual Adjust parameters , the host computer writes "1" to the Start and Dual Adjust<br />

Coils no. 4 &5, addressed as 3 & 4. One of the many possible ways:<br />

The "Query" frame sent by the host:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($20)<br />

byte 2: Function ($0F)<br />

byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Coils address Low ($00)<br />

byte 5: No. of Coils High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of coils Low ($08)<br />

byte 7: Byte Count ($01)<br />

byte 8: Force Data ($18) (coil # 4 & coil # 5)<br />

byte 9: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 10: CRC_High<br />

($XX)<br />

The normal (if no exception) response:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($20)<br />

byte 2: Function ($0F)<br />

byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Coils address Low ($00)<br />

byte 5: No. of Coils High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of coils Low ($08)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


142 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

16.11 Discrete Hardwired Inputs (1x References)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates 16 Discrete Inputs, (bit parameters), from which only 6 are operative. The other<br />

10 are reserved and were incorporated to enable use of word (16 bits) type parameters. Input # is "1 based".<br />

The actual address is 1 lower than input #. For example input #1 is addressed as 0 (10000). The inputs have<br />

the following 1x references:<br />

Input #<br />

Address <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN use Comment<br />

1 0 Stop Open Input (Input reads" 0") to Stop. (Terminal # 4)<br />

Close Input (Input reads "1") to enable Start / Run.<br />

2 1 Soft Stop Open Input (Input reads"0") to Soft Stop. (Terminal # 5)<br />

Close Input (Input reads"1") to enable Start / Run.<br />

3 2 Start Close Input (Input reads "1") to Start. (Terminal # 6)<br />

4 3 Input # 1 Close Input (Input reads "1") to turn On. (Terminal # 7)<br />

Open Input (Input reads "0") to turn Off.<br />

Programmable to: 0- Test1<br />

1- Slow Speed<br />

2- Reset<br />

5 4 Input # 2 Close Input (Input reads "1") to turn On. (Terminal # 8)<br />

Open Input (Input reads "0") to turn Off.<br />

Programmable to: 0- Dual Adjust<br />

1- S. Spd Rvrs<br />

2- Reset<br />

6 5 Reserved<br />

7 6 Ext. Fault 1 Close to Trip (Input reads" 1") (Terminal # 19)<br />

8 7 Ext. Fault 2 Close to Trip (Input reads" 1") (Terminal # 20)<br />

9..16 8..15 Reserved<br />

Example 9:<br />

To read all discrete inputs of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 12, the host computer sends the following Query frame:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0C) (12)<br />

byte 2: Function ($02)<br />

byte 3: Starting Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Starting Address Low ($00)<br />

byte 5: No. of Points High ($00)<br />

byte 6: No. of points Low ($08)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN response, when only Stop and Soft Stop terminals (Inputs 1&2) are connected:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($0C) (12)<br />

byte 2: Function ($02)<br />

byte 3: Byte Count ($01)<br />

byte 4: Data (Inputs 7..0) ($03)<br />

byte 5: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 6: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

16.12 Diagnostics<br />

Modbus Function 08 , as implemented in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN supports only Subfunction $0000. It provides for<br />

"loopback" (Return Query Data) feature, for checking the Communication Serial Link between the master and<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

To request <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN # 1 to return Query data, the master should send following Query frame:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($01)<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


143 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

byte 2: Function ($08)<br />

byte 3: Subfunction High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Subfunction Low ($00)<br />

byte 5: Data High ($37)<br />

byte 6: Data Low ($A5)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

The normal (if no exception) response is the echo of the Query:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($01)<br />

byte 2: Function ($08)<br />

byte 3: Subfunction High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Subfunction Low ($00)<br />

byte 5: Force Data High ($37)<br />

byte 6: Force Data Low ($A5)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

16.13 Exception Responses<br />

When the master sends a query frame to an <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, one of the following four responses from the <strong>HRVS</strong>-<br />

DN is possible:<br />

1. When no communication error is detected in the query, and no mistake is found by the communication<br />

program module in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN, a normal response is returned.<br />

2. If the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN does not receive the query frame (for example because of disconnected serial link cable)<br />

then no response is returned by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. After proper time the master will cause a timeout condition.<br />

3. If the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN receives the query, but faulty CRC bytes and / or Parity bits are detected, no response is<br />

returned by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. After the proper time the master will cause a timeout condition.<br />

4. If no communication error is detected in the query, but the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN communication program module<br />

finds an error such as illegal Function, data address or data value, or if the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is busy, then an<br />

Exception response is returned. The Exception response includes Exception Code to inform the master<br />

about the type of the error.<br />

Exception Code Response Frame:<br />

The Exception response frame holds fix number of 5 bytes. The first one, the Slave Address field is the Serial<br />

link number (transmitted in query and identical to <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Serial Link No.). The second byte, the Function<br />

field returns the echo of the transmitted query function, but with the Most Significant Bit set to 1 (adding $80 to<br />

the transmitted function code). The third byte is the Exception Code informing about the type of error. The last<br />

two bytes are the CRC bytes.<br />

Exception Codes supported by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN:<br />

Exception Code Type Comment<br />

01 Illegal Function Requested Function is not supported.<br />

Functions 1..6, 8, 15 or 16 are supported.<br />

02 Illegal Data Address Data address is not allowable.<br />

03 Illegal Data Value Data Value is not in allowable range.<br />

06 <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Busy <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN is busy now. The master retransmits the message<br />

later.<br />

Note: After using function 16 to store setting parameters, it is<br />

forbidden to transmit again to the same MPR after less than<br />

1Sec.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


144 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (ModBus Protocol)<br />

Example 10:<br />

The master is trying to force coil # 17 of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN 32. The <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN incorporates only 16 coils. The<br />

Illegal Data Address Exception code will be returned:<br />

Query:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($20) (32)<br />

byte 2: Function ($05)<br />

byte 3: Coil Address High ($00)<br />

byte 4: Coils address Low ($11) (17, Non existent Coil)<br />

byte 5: Force Data High ($00) ($0000 = "0" = Low)<br />

byte 6: Force Data Low ($00)<br />

byte 7: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 8: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

Exception response:<br />

byte 1: Serial Link No. ($20)<br />

byte 2: Function ($85) (Original + $80)<br />

byte 3: Exception Code ($02) (Illegal Data Address)<br />

byte 4: CRC_Low ($XX)<br />

byte 5: CRC_High ($XX)<br />

Note:<br />

There are cases where the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN returns Normal response, but the requested action cannot be<br />

performed, or is modified by the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. Few examples are:<br />

Requested Action<br />

Write Parameter settings during start process<br />

Write multiple parameters (Function 16), some are out of range<br />

Performed Action<br />

Ignored.<br />

Limit to allowed range.<br />

Start command (Function 05) while Stop Hardwired Input is open Command ignored<br />

It is the user responsibility to verify that the requested action was performed, by reading the value of the<br />

modified parameters or the status of the command Coils.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


145 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

17. <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN COMMUNICATION (PROFIBUS PROTOCOL)<br />

17.1 Global Parameters:<br />

33: ;=============================================<br />

34: ;==== General DP Keywords ====================<br />

35: ;=============================================<br />

36:<br />

37: GSD_Revision = 5<br />

38: Vendor_Name = "Solcon Ltd"<br />

39: Model_Name = "<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN"<br />

40: Revision = "1.00"<br />

41: Ident_Number = 0x0BAB<br />

42: Protocol_Ident = 0<br />

43: Station_Type = 0<br />

44: FMS_supp = 0<br />

45: Hardware_Release = "V1.00"<br />

46: Software_Release = "V1.00"<br />

47: Redundancy = 0<br />

48: Repeater_Ctrl_Sig = 2<br />

49: 24V_Pins = 0<br />

Code 1 – Global Parameters in the GSD file<br />

17.2 Operation Mode in PROFIBUS:<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN supports both DPV0 and DPV1.<br />

• DPV0 (Cyclic) allows:<br />

o Start and shutdown.<br />

o Read parameters (write parameters are not allowed via DPV0).<br />

• DPV1 allows:<br />

o Everything that DPV0 allows<br />

o Change the cyclic parameters that display via DPV0.<br />

o Write to registers.<br />

17.3 Description of the DPV0 (Cyclic) Frame:<br />

From the Profibus controller to the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN two bytes (16 bits) are transferred.<br />

From the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN to the controller 40 bytes are transferred.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


146 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Receiving from<br />

the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

Sending to the<br />

<strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

Figure 51 – DPV0 parameters (Cyclic parameters)<br />

17.3.1 Structure of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Receiving Frame<br />

The first byte must to be 0x5A (90 decimal)<br />

The second byte is as follows:<br />

Bit number: Function: Note:<br />

0 Reserved<br />

1 Reserved<br />

2 Reserved<br />

3 Start/Stop Relay<br />

Write "1" (ON) to Start / Run.<br />

Note:<br />

Bit number 0 is the LSB.<br />

4 Dual Adjust<br />

Write "0" (OFF) to Stop.<br />

Write "1" (ON) to turn On.<br />

Write "0" (OFF) to turn Off.<br />

5 Reserved<br />

6 Reserved<br />

7 Reset Write ‘1’ for reset<br />

Example:<br />

To send Reset, you first need to send 0x5A followed by 0x80.<br />

17.3.2 Structure of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Transmitting Frame<br />

The return frame contains 20 pairs of bytes (40 bytes total), representing the contents of 20 registers.<br />

Each pair of bytes represents one register; all of the registers are 16 bit numbers.<br />

The first byte represents the high value of the number (the MSB).<br />

17.3.3 Choosing the Receiving DPV0 Registers<br />

There are two methods to change which registers will be displayed in DPV0 (cyclic).<br />

• Change the parameters in the GSD file. This method can be used with both DPV0 and DPV1. The change<br />

can only take place when communication is first established.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


147 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

• Write a data request. This method can only be used with DPV1. The change can be made after<br />

communication has already been established.<br />

17.3.3.1 Selection of the DPV0 Registers by the GSD<br />

The GSD file contains a list of parameters at lines 190 to 288.<br />

The parameters appear in blocks, each block contains 4 lines, and each block refers to one register (there are<br />

20 blocks representing 20 registers).<br />

190: ExtUserPrmData = 1001 "INDIREC PAR 1"<br />

191: Unsigned16 1 1-1000<br />

192: Prm_text_Ref = 100<br />

193: EndExtUserPrmData<br />

194:<br />

196: ExtUserPrmData = 1002 "INDIREC PAR 2"<br />

197: Unsigned16 2 1-1000<br />

198: Prm_text_Ref = 100<br />

199: EndExtUserPrmData<br />

200:<br />

201: ExtUserPrmData = 1003 "INDIREC PAR 3"<br />

202: Unsigned16 3 1-1000<br />

203: Prm_text_Ref = 100<br />

204: EndExtUserPrmData<br />

205:<br />

………………<br />

………………<br />

284:<br />

285: ExtUserPrmData = 1020 "INDIREC PAR 20"<br />

286: Unsigned16 40 1-1000<br />

287: Prm_text_Ref = 100<br />

288: EndExtUserPrmdata<br />

Code 2 – GSD file, the part that is responsible for displaying the registers in DPV0 (cyclic)<br />

The second line of each block begins with “Unsigned16”, followed by the register number (shown above in<br />

green).<br />

The list of register numbers appears in section Error! Reference source not found. on page Error!<br />

Bookmark not defined..<br />

17.3.3.2 Selection of the DPV0 Registers through Data Request (DPV1)<br />

By writing to Slot number 1 and Index 2, you can change the register that appears in DPV0.<br />

Remember that for each register there are 16 bits (two bytes/one word). The first byte represents the high<br />

value of the register number.<br />

To demonstrate this, let’s say that we want to see the following registers in DPV0 (cyclic):<br />

1. Logic Status.<br />

2. I1.<br />

3. I2.<br />

4. I3.<br />

5. Voltage.<br />

6. Ctrl-In.<br />

7. Ctrl_Out (relays).<br />

8. Power.<br />

9. Power Factor.<br />

10. Frequency.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


148 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Step 1: Find the register numbers<br />

In this document, we will use a simple PROFIBUS master tool to demonstrate how to change parameters.<br />

This tool is very simple and it allows you to modify the parameters only by writing the hex numbers.<br />

Go to the table in section Error! Reference source not found. and find the register number for each register.<br />

The tool used in our example requires the hexadecimal value so we also need to convert the register number<br />

into its hex equivalent.<br />

The following table shows the register numbers for the registers used in our example.<br />

Register name Decimal number Hex number<br />

Logic Status 1 00 01<br />

I1 5 00 02<br />

I2 6 00 05<br />

I3 7 00 07<br />

Voltage 4 00 04<br />

Ctrl-In 2 00 02<br />

Ctrl_Out (relays) 3 00 03<br />

Power 15 00 0F<br />

Power Factor 17 00 11<br />

Frequency 8 00 08<br />

Step 2: Update the register numbers<br />

In the Data Request area defines the following:<br />

• Slot Number = 1<br />

• Index = 2<br />

• Operation = Write<br />

• Write Data (hex) = the hex numbers in the table above<br />

This updates the registers that are shown in DPV0.<br />

Write<br />

Figure 52 – Updating the register number that will show at DPV0 (by Data Request)<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


17.3.3.3 Reading of the DPV0 (Cyclic) Registers via Data Request (DPV1)<br />

In the Data Request areas define the following:<br />

• Slot Number = 1<br />

• Index = 2<br />

• Operation = Read<br />

The registers in DPV0 will display in the Read Data (hex) field.<br />

149 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Read<br />

Figure 53 – Reading the register number that is shown in the DPV0 (cyclic) list<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


150 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

17.4 Operations that are Available in DPV1<br />

• Choose the registers that will display in DPV0 (cyclic). This was described in the previous section.<br />

• Read and write from random registers.<br />

17.4.1 Read and Write from Random Registers via Data Request<br />

Reading or writing by Data Request (DPV1) allows you to read or write up to 20 registers in a single request.<br />

In order to read or write via Data Request (DPV1) you need to perform 2 operations:<br />

• First update the first register number that we want to read or write.<br />

• Second read or write the register.<br />

To configure the first register number, define the following:<br />

• Slot Number = 1<br />

• Index = 2<br />

• Operation = Write<br />

• Write Data (hex) = the first register number<br />

The length of the register number must always contain two bytes (word). If we want to read from register<br />

number 5 we need to read from register number 0x0005. The first byte is the high part of the number (the<br />

MSB).<br />

To read or write multiple registers, we need to define the number of the words that we want to read or write.<br />

The following example shows how to read from register number 0x80 to register number 0x83.<br />

Step 1: Write the number 80 hex to Slot number 2 and Index number 2.<br />

Write to<br />

Slot: 2<br />

Index: 2<br />

Register<br />

number 80 hex<br />

Figure 54 – Choosing register number 80 hex<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


151 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Step 2: Read from Slot number 3 and Index number 2<br />

The following eight bytes are displayed: Register number 0x80 , Register number 0x81, Register number 0x82<br />

and Register number 0x83 (4 words = 8 bytes total)<br />

Read from<br />

Slot: 3<br />

Index: 2<br />

8 byte – (4<br />

Registers)<br />

Figure 55 – Reading 4 following register by Data Request (DPV1)<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


152 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

17.5 Configure the PROFIBUS in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN<br />

All the settings to establish PROFIBUS communication are located under the Communication menu. Follow<br />

the steps below to define the PROFIBUS in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN .<br />

1. Press the MODE button until the following message appears:<br />

COMM. PARAMETERS<br />

- **** -<br />

2. Press SELECT one time and the following message will appear:<br />

COMM. PROTOCOL<br />

PROFIBUS<br />

In this menu, use the up/down arrows to define that the communication will be PROFIBUS.<br />

3. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />

BAUD RATE<br />

AUTO (PROFIBUS)<br />

4. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />

PARITY CHECK<br />

AUTO (PROFIBUS)<br />

5. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />

PROFI.NETWORK ID<br />

3<br />

In this menu, use the up/down arrows to define the PROFIBUS Address of the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN.<br />

6. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />

S.LINK PAR. SAVE<br />

ENABLE<br />

In this menu, use the up/down arrows to define whether to enable/disable writing of parameters via<br />

the PROFIBUS.<br />

7. Press SELECT again and the following message will appear:<br />

SER.LINK CONTROL<br />

ENABLE<br />

In this menu, use the up/down arrows to define whether to enable/disable control via the<br />

PROFIBUS.<br />

8. Press SELECT again a number of times until the following message appears:<br />

Store Settings<br />

COMM. Parameters<br />

Pressing the STORE button stores the parameters in the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN memory.<br />

17.6 Watch Dog Definition<br />

The Watch-Dog mechanism can be enabled or disabled only via the PROFIBUS controller.<br />

When the Watch-Dog is enabled, the <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN will stop the motor when there is a break in<br />

communication between the controller and the device.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


153 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

17.7 Numbers of actual data Register for (decimal)<br />

Number Parameter Name Description<br />

Logic status of <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN. 1 indicates:<br />

d15: <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Tripped.<br />

d14: Motor Stopped.<br />

d13: Motor in Soft Stop Process.<br />

d12: Motor in Start Process.<br />

d11: Motor is Running.<br />

d10: Motor is running with Closed By_Pass.<br />

1 Logic Status<br />

d9: Up_To_Speed. Like d10 and I reduced (once) below 115% of<br />

FLA.<br />

d8: Reserved.<br />

d7: Dual_Adjust On.<br />

d6..d0: Reserved.<br />

Note: After by-pass is closed, trip (d15) and running (d11), can be ON<br />

together. See Trip_after_By-Pass setting parameter at fault parameters<br />

page.<br />

Discrete Hardwired control inputs:<br />

d15..d8: Reserved.<br />

d7: External fault 2, Terminal 20.<br />

d6: External Fault 1,Terminal 19.<br />

2 Hardwired inputs<br />

d5: Reserved.<br />

d4: Programmable Input , Terminal 8<br />

d3: Programmable Input, Terminal 7<br />

d2: Start Input. Terminal 6<br />

d1: Soft Stop Input. Terminal 5<br />

d0: Stop Input. Terminal 4<br />

3 Relays d0 - Immediate, d1- End Of Acc, d2 - Fault relay<br />

4 Voltage Line voltage, % of rated voltage.<br />

5 I1_amp Current of phase 1, Ampere.<br />

6 I2_amp Current of phase 2, Ampere.<br />

7 I3_amp Current of phase 3, Ampere.<br />

8 Reserved<br />

d15..d8: Reserved.<br />

d7: Setting Lock - (right-most)<br />

d6: Enlarged Setting Ranges<br />

d5: Language Selection.<br />

9 Dip_Switch<br />

d4: Language Selection.<br />

d3: Reserved - Must be set to Off.<br />

d2: Generator Starting - Set to Off.<br />

d1: Tacho feedback available (1).<br />

d0: Min (off) / Max display pages- (left most)<br />

10 Phase_Sequence 1: Correct Phase seq. 0 : Wrong Phase Seq.<br />

11 Motor Insulation R Motor Insulation Resistance [KOhm]<br />

12 Reserved<br />

13 Reserved<br />

14 Reserved<br />

15 Power Power consumption [KW]<br />

16 Reactive Power Reactive Power consumption [KVAR]<br />

17 Power Factor Power Factor * 100<br />

18 Time Since Last Start Elapsed minutes since last start<br />

19 Frequency Frequency [tenth Hz]<br />

20 Reserved<br />

21 Reserved<br />

22 Reserved<br />

23 Reserved<br />

24 Reserved<br />

25<br />

Logic Status at Power<br />

Fail<br />

Logic Status at Control Pwr Supply turn off.<br />

26 Total Run Time Total Hours of Running Motor.<br />

27 Total Starts Total Number Of Start<br />

28 Last start period Duration of last start, Seconds<br />

29 Last start peak I Peak current during last starting process<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


154 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Number Parameter Name Description<br />

30 Time to start After too many starts trip, Seconds<br />

31 Total trips Total number of trips<br />

# of the fault that caused trip.<br />

# Fault<br />

01: Over Temperature<br />

02: Over current / Shear pin<br />

03: Overload<br />

04: Under Current<br />

05: Under / No Voltage<br />

06: Over Voltage<br />

07: Phase Loss<br />

08: Phase Sequence<br />

09: Wrong Connection or Shorted SCR.<br />

10: Long Start Time<br />

32 Last trip number 11: Set Curve to 0<br />

12: External Fault 1 (Input # 3)<br />

13: External Fault 2 (Input # 4)<br />

14: Wrong Parameters<br />

15: Mains ON & No Start Signal<br />

16: Too Many Starts<br />

17: Currents Unbalance<br />

18: Insulation<br />

19: Ground Fault<br />

20: Open By-Pass<br />

21: Frequency out of range<br />

22: Comm Port Failure<br />

23: Set Clock<br />

33 Pre Trip Current at trip time, % of FLA<br />

34 Reserved<br />

35 Reserved<br />

36 Reserved<br />

37 Reserved<br />

38 Reserved<br />

39 Thermal Capacity Simulated winding temperature, %. 100% = trip<br />

40 Reserved<br />

41 Clk Hour Setting can be done at setting # 130<br />

42 Clk Minute Setting can be done at setting # 131<br />

43 Clk Month Setting can be done at setting # 132<br />

44 Clk Date Setting can be done at setting # 133<br />

45 Clk Year Setting can be done at setting # 134<br />

46 Reserved<br />

47 KWH_LS KWH dword parameter: LS word<br />

48 KWH_MS KWH dword parameter: MS word<br />

49 KVARH_ LS KVARH dword parameter: LS word<br />

50 KVARH_MS KVARH dword parameter: MS word<br />

51 Reserved<br />

52 Reserved<br />

53 Reserved<br />

54 Reserved<br />

55 Reserved<br />

56 Reserved<br />

57 Trip Array 1 List of last 10 Trip<br />

58 Trip Array 2 List of last 10 Trip<br />

59 Trip Array 3 List of last 10 Trip<br />

60 Trip Array 4 List of last 10 Trip<br />

61 Trip Array 5 List of last 10 Trip<br />

62 Trip Array 6 List of last 10 Trip<br />

63 Trip Array 7 List of last 10 Trip<br />

64 Trip Array 8 List of last 10 Trip<br />

65 Trip Array 9 List of last 10 Trip<br />

66 Trip Array 10 List of last 10 Trip<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


155 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Number Parameter Name Description<br />

67 Trip Hour Array 1 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

68 Trip Hour Array 2 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

69 Trip Hour Array 3 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

70 Trip Hour Array 4 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

71 Trip Hour Array 5 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

72 Trip Hour Array 6 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

73 Trip Hour Array 7 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

74 Trip Hour Array 8 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

75 Trip Hour Array 9 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

76 Trip Hour Array 10 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

77 Trip Minute Array 1 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

78 Trip Minute Array 2 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

79 Trip Minute Array 3 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

80 Trip Minute Array 4 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

81 Trip Minute Array 5 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

82 Trip Minute Array 6 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

83 Trip Minute Array 7 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

84 Trip Minute Array 8 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

85 Trip Minute Array 9 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

86 Trip Minute Array 10 List of time (Hour) of last 10 trips<br />

87 Trip Date Array 1 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

88 Trip Date Array 2 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

89 Trip Date Array 3 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

90 Trip Date Array 4 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

91 Trip Date Array 5 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

92 Trip Date Array 6 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

93 Trip Date Array 7 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

94 Trip Date Array 8 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

95 Trip Date Array 9 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

96 Trip Date Array 10 List of date (day) of the last 10 trips<br />

97 Trip Month Array 1 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

98 Trip Month Array 2 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

99 Trip Month Array 3 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

100 Trip Month Array 4 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

101 Trip Month Array 5 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

102 Trip Month Array 6 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

103 Trip Month Array 7 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

104 Trip Month Array 8 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

105 Trip Month Array 9 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

106 Trip Month Array 10 List of date (Month) of the last 10 trips<br />

107 Trip Year Array 1 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

108 Trip Year Array 2 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

109 Trip Year Array 3 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

110 Trip Year Array 4 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

111 Trip Year Array 5 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

112 Trip Year Array 6 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

113 Trip Year Array 7 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

114 Trip Year Array 8 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

115 Trip Year Array 9 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

116 Trip Year Array 10 List of date (Year) of the last 10 trips<br />

117 Trip Pointer Pointer of the 10 cyclic above arrays<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


156 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Number Parameter Name Description<br />

118-150 Reserved<br />

151 Actual_Data_Group_1 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

152 Actual_Data_Group_2 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

153 Actual_Data_Group_3 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

154 Actual_Data_Group_4 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

155 Actual_Data_Group_5 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

156 Actual_Data_Group_6 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

157 Actual_Data_Group_7 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

158 Actual_Data_Group_8 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

159 Actual_Data_Group_9 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

160 Actual_Data_Group_10 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

161 Actual_Data_Group_11 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

162 Actual_Data_Group_12 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

163 Actual_Data_Group_13 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

164 Actual_Data_Group_14 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

165 Actual_Data_Group_15 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

166 Actual_Data_Group_16 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

167 Actual_Data_Group_17 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

168 Actual_Data_Group_18 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

169 Actual_Data_Group_19 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

170 Actual_Data_Group_20 Group of 20 actual parameters selected by setting parameters 90..109.<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


17.8 Number of Setting Registers for Data Request<br />

17.8.1 Main & protect. parameters<br />

157 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Rated Line Voltage 0 6600..15000 6600 (Volt.)<br />

Starter FLC 1 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />

Motor FLA 2 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />

Rated Motor Power 3 50..40000 1000 (KW)<br />

Service Factor 4 100..130 (% of FLA) 100 (%)<br />

Undercurrent Trip 5 0..90 0 (% of FLA)<br />

Undercurrent Delay 6 1..40 10 (Seconds)<br />

Overcurrent Shear Pin 7 100..850 850 (% of FLA)<br />

Overcurrent Delay 8 0..50 5 (0.5 Sec.)<br />

Overload Class 9<br />

IEC 5,10,15,20,25,30<br />

NEMA 5,10,15,20,25,30 FLA)<br />

IEC Class 10<br />

Overload Protect 10<br />

0=Disable<br />

1=Enable While Run<br />

1=Enable While Run<br />

2=Enable<br />

Unbalance Trip 11 10..100, 101 = Off 20 (%)<br />

Unbalance Delay 12 1..60 5 (Seconds)<br />

Ground Fault Trip 13 10..100, 101 = Off 20 (% of FLA)<br />

Ground Fault Delay 14 1..60 5 (Seconds)<br />

Undervoltage Trip 15 50..90 70 (%)<br />

Undervoltage Delay 16 1..100 5 (Seconds)<br />

Overvoltage Trip 17 110..125, 126 (=off) 120 (%)<br />

Overvoltage Delay 18 1..10 2 (Seconds)<br />

Reserved 20..24<br />

17.9 Start Parameters<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Soft_Start_Curve 24<br />

0..11 (6..11 are for Tacho<br />

only)<br />

1 (Standard).<br />

Pulse Level 25 70 (%of FLA) – 700 (%of FLA) 70% of FLA<br />

Pulse Time 26 0..10 (Tenth Seconds) 0 (No Pulse)<br />

Initial Voltage /<br />

10..80 /<br />

30 (% of full voltage) /<br />

27<br />

Initial Current<br />

100..400 % (of FLA)<br />

100 (% of FLA)<br />

Current Limit 28 100..700 400 (% of FLA)<br />

Acceleration Time 29 1..90 10 (Seconds)<br />

Max. Start Time 30 1..250 30 (Seconds)<br />

Number Of Starts 31 1..10 & (11 = off) 1<br />

Starts_Period 32 1..60 20 (Minutes)<br />

Start Inhibit 33 1..60 minutes 15 (Minutes)<br />

Run Contact Delay /<br />

Turn Bypass On at<br />

34<br />

Min Time To Bypass 35 3..60<br />

Reserved 36..39<br />

17.10 Stop Parameters<br />

0..120 minutes /<br />

121..250 % of Motor FLA<br />

5 (Seconds) /<br />

Only with relay card for<br />

optional sync motor start<br />

3 Sec<br />

Only with relay card for<br />

optional sync motor start<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Soft_Stop_Curve 40 0..11 (6..11 are for Tacho only) 1 (Standard)<br />

Deceleration_Time 41 0..90 0 (Seconds)<br />

Final_Torque 42 0..10 0 (Minimum)<br />

Reserved 43..47<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


158 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

17.11 Dual Adjust Parameters<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

DA Initial Voltage /<br />

10..80 % of full voltage / 30 /<br />

48<br />

DA Initial Current<br />

100..400 % of FLA<br />

100 % of FLA<br />

DA Current Limit 49 100..700 400 % of FLA<br />

DA Acceleration Time 50 1..90 10 (Seconds)<br />

DA Deceleration Time 51 0..90 0 (Seconds)<br />

DA Motor FLA 52 20..1800 150 (Amp.)<br />

Reserved 53..55<br />

17.12 Fault Parameters<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

UV & PL Auto_Reset 56 0..1 (0 - No, 1 - Yes) 0 (No)<br />

Under_Current_Reset 57 10..120 (&121=off) 121 (Off)<br />

By-Pass_Open_Trip 58 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />

Trip_after_By-Pass 59 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />

By-Pass_Auto_Reset 60 0 – No, 1 – Yes 0 (No)<br />

Set_Curve_To_0 61 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />

Power On & No Start 62 0 / 1 (0 – Disable,1 - Enable) 1 (Enable)<br />

Insulation_Alarm 63 1(Off) – 100 (10 Mohm) 1 (Off)<br />

Insulation_Trip 64 1(Off) – 100 (10 Mohm) 1 (Off)<br />

Phase Sequence 65 0 – Pos., 1 – Neg., 2 – Ignore 0 (Positive)<br />

Reserved 66..71<br />

17.13 I/O Programming<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Prog. Input #7 (thermal 7) 72<br />

0..3<br />

0 – Test<br />

1 – Reset<br />

2 – Multi Soft Stop - consult the 1 (Reset)<br />

factory<br />

3 – Current Control - consult the<br />

factory<br />

Prog. Input #8 (thermal 8) 73 0..1 (0=D.Adj.,1=Reset) 0 (Dual Adjust)<br />

Fault Relay Type 74 0..1 (0=Fault, 1=Fault-Fail Safe) 0 (Fault)<br />

Immediate Realy Type 75 0..1 (0=Immediate, 1=shear pin) 0 (Immediate)<br />

Realy On Delay 76 0..3600 0 (Seconds)<br />

Realy Off Delay 77 0..3600 0 (Seconds)<br />

Analog output 78 0..1 (0 - Normal, 1 - Inverted) 0 (Normal)<br />

Reserved 79<br />

17.14 Communication Parameters<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Comm. Protocol 80 0 – Modbus, 1-Profibus 1 – Profibus<br />

Modbus Baud Rate 81 12..96 (*100) 192 (19200 bps)<br />

Parity Check 82 0/1/2 (Even / Odd / No) 0 (Even)<br />

Profibus_Network 83 0..126 (0-Off) 0 (Off)<br />

S. Link Parameters Save 84 0 (Disable), 1 (Enable) 0 (Disable saving)<br />

Ser. Link Control 85 0 (Disable), 1 (Enable) 0 (Disable control)<br />

Front Com Adress 86 1..247 & (248= Off) 248 (Off)<br />

Reserved 87..88<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


159 • <strong>HRVS</strong>-DN Communication (Profibus protocol)<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Defaults # are:<br />

1 - Logic Status<br />

5 – I1<br />

6 – I2<br />

7 – I3<br />

4 – Voltage<br />

2 – Ctrl-In<br />

3 – Ctrl_Out (relays)<br />

15 – Power<br />

17 – Power Factor<br />

Modbus_#_Array<br />

89..108 # of parameter<br />

19 – Frequency<br />

10 – Phase Sequence<br />

26 – Total Run Time<br />

27 – Total Starts<br />

31 – Total Trips<br />

28 – Last Start Period<br />

29 – Last Start Peak I<br />

32 – Last Trip Number<br />

33 – Pre Trip I<br />

39 – Thermal Capacity<br />

11 – Insulation Resistance<br />

17.15 Time Parameters<br />

Parameter # Range Default<br />

Clk Hour 130 0 – 23 Set here, Read at actual # 41<br />

Clk Minute 131 0 – 59 Set here, Read at actual # 42<br />

Clk Month 132 1 – 12 Set here, Read at actual # 43<br />

Clk Day 133 1 – 31 Set here, Read at actual # 44<br />

Clk Year 134 0 – 99 Set here, Read at actual # 45<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


160 • Parameters List<br />

18. PARAMETERS LIST<br />

Parameter<br />

Default setting<br />

MAIN & PROTECT refer to section 7.8.2 page 55<br />

Range<br />

Range w/dip switch #7=ON<br />

RATED LINE VOLT. 6600 VOLT. 2300-15000 VOLT.<br />

STARTER FLC 150 AMP. 20 – 1800 AMP.<br />

MOTOR FLA 150 AMP. 33-100% of STARTER FLC<br />

RATED MOTOR PWR 1000KW 50-40000KW<br />

SERVICE POWER 100% 100-130%<br />

UNDERCURR. TRIP 0% OF FLA 0 = OFF, 20-90% of FLA<br />

UNDERCURR. DELAY 10 SEC. 1-40 SEC.<br />

O/C – SHEAR PIN 850% OF FLA 100 – 850% OF FLA<br />

O/C DELAY 0.5 SEC. 0.0 - 5 SEC.<br />

OVERLOAD CLASS IEC CLASS 10 IEC CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30<br />

NEMA CLASS 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30<br />

OVERLOAD PROTECT ENABLE WHILE RUN DISABLE, ENABLE WHILE RUN,<br />

ENABLE<br />

UNBALANCE TRIP 20% OF FLA OFF/10-100% OF FLA<br />

UNBALANCE DELAY 5 SEC. 1-60 SEC.<br />

GND FAULT TRIP 20% OF FLA OFF/ 10-100%<br />

GND FAULT DELAY 5 SEC. 1-60 SEC.<br />

UNDERVOLT. TRIP 70% OF Vn 50-90% OF Vn.<br />

UNDERVOLT. DELAY 5 SEC. 1-10 SEC.<br />

OVERVOLT TRIP 120% OF Vn. OFF/110-125% OF Vn<br />

OVERVOLT DELAY 2 SEC. 1-10 SEC.<br />

START PARAMETERS refer to section 7.8.3 page 60<br />

SOFT START CURVE 1 (STANDARD) 0 (BASIC)= Basic<br />

1 (STANDARD)= Standard Curve<br />

2!! = Pump Control Curve # 1<br />

3!! = Pump Control Curve # 2<br />

4!! = Pump Control Curve # 3<br />

5 (RORQUE) = Torque Control<br />

START TACHO. GAIN<br />

When setting Dip sw. # 2<br />

On for Tacho Mode<br />

Note: Tacho Feedback<br />

functions in its basic form.<br />

Additional curves except<br />

for the basic Linear curve<br />

are optional. Consult the<br />

factory for correct tacho<br />

selection and mechanical<br />

installation.<br />

PULSE LEVEL<br />

0 (MIN. GAIN) 0 (MIN. GAIN)= Minimum gain tacho<br />

control<br />

1!! = Second level Tacho gain<br />

2!! = Third level Tacho gain<br />

3!! = Fourth level Tacho gain<br />

4!! = Fifth level Tacho gain<br />

5!! = Sixth level Tacho gain<br />

70% OF FLA<br />

PULSE TIME 0.0 SEC. 0-10 SEC.<br />

INITIAL VOLTAGE<br />

or INITIAL CURRENT<br />

CURRENT LIMIT<br />

ACC. TIME<br />

MAX. START TIME<br />

30%<br />

or 100%<br />

400% OF FLA<br />

10 SEC.<br />

30 SEC.<br />

70-700% OF FLA.<br />

If PULSE TIME>1sec 400%<br />

70-700% OF FLA. If PULSE<br />

TIME>1sec, with the maximum<br />

limitation of: 440x(FLC/FLA)<br />

10-50% of Vn<br />

or 100-400% of motor FLA<br />

5-80% of Vn<br />

or 100-400% of motor FLA<br />

100-400% of motor FLA.<br />

100-700% of motor FLA. With the<br />

maximum limitation of:<br />

440x(FLC/FLA)<br />

1-30 SEC.<br />

1-90 SEC.<br />

1-30 SEC.<br />

1-250 SEC.<br />

NUMBER OF STARTS 1 1-10, OFF.<br />

STARTS PERIOD 20 MIN. 1-60 MIN.<br />

START INHIBIT 15 MIN. 1-60 MIN.<br />

RUN CONTACT DLY 5 SEC. 0-120 SEC.<br />

TURN BYPASS ON AT * 120% OF FLA 120-300% OF FLA<br />

MIN TIME TO BYPS * 3 SEC. 3-60 SEC.<br />

* Only displays if optional relay PCB is installed and pressing<br />

key for 10 seconds when RUN CONTACT DLY parameters<br />

reaches maximum.<br />

Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Set 4<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


161 • Parameters List<br />

Parameter<br />

Default setting<br />

Range<br />

Range w/dip switch #7=ON<br />

STOP PARAMETERS refer to section 7.8.4 page 66<br />

SOFT STOP CURVE 1 (STANDARD) 0 (BASIC) = Basic<br />

1 (STANDARD)= Standard Curve<br />

2!! = Pump Control Curve # 1<br />

3!! = Pump Control Curve # 2<br />

Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Set 4<br />

STOP TACHO. GAIN<br />

When setting Dip sw # 2<br />

On for Tacho Mode,<br />

Note: Tacho Feedback<br />

functions in its basic form.<br />

Additional curves except<br />

for the basic Linear curve<br />

are optional. Consult the<br />

factory for correct tacho<br />

selection and mechanical<br />

installation.<br />

DEC. TIME<br />

4!! = Pump Control Curve # 3<br />

5 (TORQUE) = Torque Control<br />

0 (MIN. GAIN) 0 (MIN. GAIN)= Minimum gain tacho<br />

control<br />

1!! = Second level tacho gain<br />

2!! = Third level tacho gain<br />

3!! = Fourth level tacho gain<br />

4!! = Fifth level tacho gain<br />

5!! = Sixth level tacho gain<br />

0 SEC.<br />

0-30 SEC.<br />

0-90 SEC.<br />

FINAL TORQUE 0 (MIN) 0 (MIN.)– 10 (MAX.)<br />

DUAL ADJUSTMENT refer to section 7.8.5 page 68<br />

PARAMETERS<br />

DA: INIT. VOLT<br />

or DA: INIT. CURRENT<br />

DA: CUR. LIMIT<br />

DA: ACC. TIME<br />

DA: DEC. TIME<br />

30%<br />

or 100%<br />

400% OF FLA<br />

10 SEC.<br />

0 SEC.<br />

10-50% of Vn<br />

or 100-400% of motor FLA<br />

5-80% of Vn<br />

or 100-400% of motor FLA<br />

100-400% of motor FLA.<br />

100-700% of motor FLA. With the<br />

maximum limitation of:<br />

440x(FLC/FLA)<br />

1-30 SEC.<br />

1-90 SEC.<br />

0-30 SEC.<br />

0-90 SEC.<br />

DA: MOTOR FLA 150 AMP 33-100% of STARTER FLC<br />

FAULT PARAMETERS refer to section 7.8.6 page 69<br />

UV & PL AUTO RST NO YES/NO<br />

UNDER CUR. RESET OFF 10-120 MIN. / OFF<br />

BYPASS OPEN TRIP ENABLE ENABLE / DISABLE<br />

TRIP AFTER BYPAS ENABLE ENABLE / DISABLE<br />

BY-PASS AUTO RST NO YES/NO<br />

SET CURVE 0 FLT ENABLE ENABLE / DISABLE<br />

PWR ON & NO STRT ENABLE ENABLE / DISABLE<br />

INSULATION ALARM OFF OFF/ 0.2-20Mohm<br />

INSULATION TRIP OFF OFF/ 0.2-20Mohm<br />

PHASE SEQUENCE POSITIVE POSITIVE/NEGATIVE/IGNORE<br />

I/O PROGRAMMING<br />

PARAMETERS<br />

refer to section 7.8.7 page 71<br />

PROG. INPUT #7 RESET TEST/ RESET/MULTI SOFT STOP<br />

(MULTI SOFT STOP with optional<br />

software only)<br />

PROG. INPUT #8 DUAL ADJUSTMENT DUAL ADJUSTMENT/RESET<br />

FAULT RELAY TYPE FAULT FAULT/FAULT – FAIL SAFE<br />

IMM / # STRT PREAL IMMEDIATE IMMEDIATE/# STRTS PREALRM<br />

RELAY ON DELAY 0 SEC. 0.0-3600 SEC.<br />

RELAY OFF DELAY 0 SEC. 0.0-3600 SEC.<br />

ANALOG OUTPUT RELATIVE CURRENT RELATIVE CURRENT/RELATIVE<br />

POWER<br />

COMM. PARAMETERS<br />

MODBUS<br />

refer to section 7.8.8 page 73<br />

COMM. PROTOCOL MODBUS MODBUS/PROFIBUS<br />

BAUD RATE 9600(MODBUS) 1200/2400/4800/9600<br />

PARITY CHECK EVEN EVEN/ODD/NO<br />

SERIAL LINK NO. OFF OFF/1-247<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


162 • Parameters List<br />

Parameter<br />

Default setting<br />

Range<br />

Range w/dip switch #7=ON<br />

S.LINK PAR. SAVE DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />

SER. LINK CONTROL DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />

FRONT COM ADDRES OFF OFF/1-247<br />

COMM. PARAMETERS<br />

PROFIBUS<br />

refer to section 7.8.9 page 73<br />

COMM. PROTOCOL PROFIBUS MODBUS/PROFIBUS<br />

BAUD RATE<br />

AUTO(PROFIBUS)<br />

PROFI.NETWORK ID OFF OFF/1-126<br />

S.LINK PAR. SAVE DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />

SER. LINK CONTROL DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />

SER. LINK CONTROL DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE<br />

FRONT COM ADDRES OFF OFF/1-247<br />

STATISTICAL DATA refer to section 7.8.10 page 74<br />

T SINCE LST STRT<br />

Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 Set 4<br />

LAST STRT PERIOD<br />

LAST START MAX I.<br />

TOTAL RUN TIME<br />

TOTAL # OF START<br />

TOTAL ENERGY<br />

TOTAL R. ENERGY<br />

LAST TRIP<br />

TRIP CURRENT<br />

TOTAL # OF TRIPS<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -1<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -2<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -3<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -4<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -5<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -6<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -7<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -8<br />

PREVIOUS TRIP -9<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


163 • General Information:<br />

19. GENERAL INFORMATION:<br />

Supply Voltage .........................Line to Line 2,300V, 3,300V, 4,160V, 6,000V, 6,600V, 6,900V, 11,000V,<br />

13,800V, 15,000V (consult the factory for other voltages) + 10%-15%<br />

P.I.V ratings...............................Not less than 3 times rated voltage<br />

Frequency .................................45 – 65 Hz (with frequency automatically change)<br />

Control Supply...........................110-230V 50/60Hz(to be specified) +10% - 15%<br />

110VDC, 125VDC, 220VDC (to be specified) +10% - 15%<br />

Control inputs & Outputs ...........Either same as Control Supply or by special order 24-230V AC/DC (to be<br />

specified)<br />

Load ..........................................Three phases, three wire, squirrel cage induction motor.<br />

Synchronous motor with asynchronous starting characteristics.<br />

Start-Stop Parameters:<br />

Starter FLC................................Starter Full Load Current according to Selector Guide<br />

Motor FLA..................................Motor Full Load Ampere 33-100% of starter FLC<br />

Pump Control Curves ................6 field selectable curves including torque control curve preventing overpressure<br />

during start and water hammer during stop.<br />

Pulse Start Level and Duration..Adjustable level of pulse, for an adjustable time 0-10 Sec, for starting high<br />

friction loads or holding constant current level.<br />

Initial Voltage.............................10-50% Un (*5-85%)<br />

Initial Current .............................for current ramp<br />

Current Limit..............................100-400% of Motor FLA (*100-700%)<br />

Acceleration Time......................1-30 Sec (*1-90 sec)<br />

Deceleration Time .....................0-30 Sec (*0-90 sec)<br />

Dual Adjustments ......................Secondary start stop characteristic for: Motor FLA, Initial Voltage, Current<br />

Limit, Acceleration Time and Deceleration Time.<br />

Tacho and Linear Acceleration..12 field selectable curves – defining Tacho Feedback gain improving linearity.<br />

Motor Protection:<br />

Too many starts.........................Maximum number of starts range Off or 1-10, during a time period 1-60 min.<br />

Starts inhibit...............................Time period 1-60 min, where starting is prevented, after too many starts fault.<br />

Long start time (Stall protection)Maximum allowable starting time 1-30 sec. (*1-250 Sec).<br />

Over current (Shear-pin)............Two operation functions: during starting trips the starter at 850% and during<br />

running at 100-850% In, both within 1 Cycle.<br />

Electronic overload……………..According to IEC class 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 OR according to NEMA class 5,<br />

10, 15, 20, 25 or 30.<br />

Under current ............................Trips when current drops below 20-90% In with time delay of 1-40 sec.<br />

Under voltage** .........................Trips when main voltage drops below 50-90% of Un. Time delay 1-10 Sec<br />

Over voltage ..............................Trips when main voltage increases above 110-125% of Un.<br />

Time delay of 1-10 sec.<br />

Phase loss.................................Trips when one or two phases are missing.<br />

Phase sequence****. .................Trips when phase sequence is wrong.<br />

Wrong connection & Shorted SCR…<br />

Prevents starting, trips if motor is not connected / incorrectly connected to the<br />

starter or in case one or more SCRs have been shorted.<br />

_______________________________________________________________________________________________


164 • General Information:<br />

Heat-sink over temp. .................Trips when heat-sink temperature rises above 85˚C.<br />

External fault 1 ..........................Trips when an external contact closes for 2 sec.<br />

External fault 2 ..........................Trips when an external contact closes for 2 sec.<br />

Unbalance Current. ...................Trips when Current Unbalance exceeds preset value for more than<br />

“Unbalance delay”<br />

Ground Fault Current.................Trips when Ground Fault Current exceeds preset level for more than “Gnd<br />

Fault Delay”<br />

Power ON & No Start****...........Trips when three phases voltage is connected to the soft-starter input and<br />

start signal was not issued for more than 30 seconds.<br />

By-Pass Open ****.....................Trips if the Bypass Contactor and one or two if its phases did not close.<br />

* Special settings, extended range<br />

** With optional Auto Reset<br />

*** Future enhancement<br />

**** Can be disable<br />

Control:<br />

Displays.....................................LCD in 4 – Field selectable languages and 8 LEDs<br />

Keypad ......................................6 keys for easy setting<br />

Aux. Contact – Immediate .........1 C/O, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA<br />

Aux. Contact – End of Acceleration..1 C/O, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA<br />

Fault Contact .............................1 C/O, 8A, 250VAC, 2000VA<br />

Communication .........................RS 485 with MODBUS or PROFIBUS protocols<br />

Temperatures...........................Operating -10˚ to 50˚C<br />

Storage -20˚ to 70˚C<br />

Enclosure:<br />

Degree of Protection..................IP 00 - Chassis type<br />

IP 32 - Standard<br />

IP 54 – Optional<br />

Paint ..........................................RAL 7032 – standard<br />

Other colors - optional<br />

Normal Service Conditions:<br />

Altitude ......................................Should not exceed 1000m.<br />

Consult the factory for equipment to be used at higher altitudes.<br />

Humidity ....................................95% Non condensed<br />

Starter Consumption Ratings (for IP00 OEM Kit)<br />

Peak consumption.....................350VA during start process and less than 20 VA otherwise<br />

Solcon Industries Ltd.<br />

www.solcon.com; Technical support: office@solcon.com<br />

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!